Home

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller User Manual

1. Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X RunForward X RunReverse X ResetFault X X X X X Hfp y Reserved X Out00 X Out01 X Out02 X Out03 X Outd4 X Out05 X X Reserved AuxlOStatus Parameter Number 8 The parameter provides the status of peti SET hardware input output points Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X Pt00 X Pt01 X Pt02 X Pt03 X Pt04 X Pt05 XIXI XIXIXIXIXI XIXJX Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 105 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters NetworkStatus Parameter Number 9 The parameter provides the status of the Acess Rule SET network connections Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxDF Default Value 0 st Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 514 3 0 X ExplicitCnxn 1 0Connection ExplicitCnxnFit X 10CnxnFault X l0Cnxnldle X Reserve X DLREnabled DLRFault XIXI IXI XIX XI X X Reserved DLXCo
2. Device Input Status Tags Tag Description Use Fault Communication fault between PLC and device all 1s fault all 0s normal TripPresent Fault exists within unit WarningPresent Warning of potential fault RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse Ready Control and 3 phase power present CurrentFlowing Current is passing to motor DeviceLogixEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled KeypadAuto HOA is in Auto mode KeypadOff HOA is in Off mode KeypadHand HOA is in Hand mode DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed Pt0OData User configured 1 0 status Pt01Data User configured 1 0 status Pt02Data User configured 1 0 status Pt03Data User configured 1 0 status Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt04Data Pt05Data User configured 1 0 status Pt0ODeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt01DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt02DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt03DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt04DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt0SDeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt06DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt07DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt08DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status PtO9DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt10DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt11DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt12DeviceOu DeviceLogix netwo
3. Switched SW Common Un Switched sinking usw Input or Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points Figure 26 Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing At Motor Disconnect Reverser L1 L2 L3 Disconnect Status Fwd amp Rev Status Fwd amp Rev Control Switched SW Common Un Switched Sinking usw Input or Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Chapter 2 51 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Figure 27 Bulletin 294E VFD At Motor Disconnect Drive Enable Disconnect Status Switched SW Common Un Switched Sih USW Input uF Sensor Voltage Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 pOINTS Figure 28 Bulletin 294E VFD with SB At Motor Disconnect L1 4 L2 o q L3 Q 4 mir Drive Enable Disconnect Status SK 16 AWG Minimum 5 40A BCPD max Brake Switched SW Common Un Switched Sinking USW bem Input or Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Fi
4. Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance 27 54 OutNetFaultState 54 28 56 OutNetFaultValue 55 29 58 OutNetldleState 56 30 60 OutNetldleValue 57 31 62 Input00Function 58 32 64 Input01Function 59 33 66 Input02Function 60 34 68 Input03Function 61 35 70 Input04Function 62 36 72 Input05Function 63 37 74 NetworkOverride 64 38 76 CommOverride 65 39 78 KeypadMode 66 40 80 KeypadDisable 67 41 82 AccelTime2 69 42 84 DecelTime2 70 43 86 MotorOLRetention 71 44 88 InternalFreq 72 45 90 SkipFrequency 73 46 92 SkipFreqBand 74 47 94 DCBrakeTime 75 48 96 DCBrakeLevel 76 49 98 ReverseDisable 77 50 100 FlytingStartEna 78 51 102 Compensation 79 52 104 SlipHertzAtFLA 80 53 106 BusRegulateMode 81 54 108 MotorOLSelect 82 55 110 SWCurrentTrip 83 56 112 AutoRestartTries 84 57 114 AutoRestartDelay 85 58 116 BoostSelect 86 59 118 MaximumVoltage 87 60 120 MotorNamPlateFLA 88 61 122 BrakeMode 89 62 124 BrkFreqIhresh 90 63 126 BrkCurrThresh 91 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Instance 150 CIP Information Appendix B Instance 150 is the default Output Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E starters Instance 150 Starter Cmd DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters Byte Bit7 Bit 6 B
5. Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set Run 1 BOOL These Run outputs also map to DOP Instances 1 and 2 40 Get Set Run 2 BOOL 7 Get Running 1 BOOL 80 Get Running 2 BOOL 9 Get Ready BOOL 10 Get Tripped BOOL 12 Get Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 gt 1 Trip Reset Reversing Starters 291E and Inverter 294E Starters only The following common services will be implemented for the Control Supervisor Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Overload Object CLASS CODE 0x002C No class attributes will be supported for the Overload Object A single instance Instance 1 of the Overload Object is supported for DOL Bulletin 290E 291E and Reversing Bulletin 294E Starters Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set FLA Setting BOOL XXX X amps 4 Get Set Trip Class USINT 5 Get Average Current INT XXX X amps 7 Get Thermal Utilized USINT xxx FLA 8 Get Current L1 INT 9 Get Current L2 INT Xxx x Amps 10 Get Current L3 INT 190 Get Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL 192 Get Average Current Times 10 UINT 193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT Xxx xx Amps 194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT 195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B The followi
6. DCBusVoltage Parameter Number 5 This parameter provides the present DC Access Rule ae bus voltage level Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units VDC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1200 Default Value 0 Starter Status Parameter Number 6 This parameter provides the status Access Rule a of the starter Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxDFFF Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 5 4 3 TripPresent WarningPresent RunningForward X RunningReverse X Ready X NetControlStatus X NetRefStatus X AtReference X DLXEnabled X KeyPadAuto X KeyPadOff X KeyPadHand X KeyPadJogging X Reserved X DisconnectClosed X BrakeStatus Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 125 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters StarterCommand Parameter Number 7 The parameter provides the command Beet GET status of the starter Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxFF1F Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 71 16 54 3 0 X RunningForward RunningReverse ResetFault X JogForward X JogReverse X X X Reserved Out00 X Out01
7. off CI esos yan mare Unswitched Control Power Disconnect Motor Controller a N i yA Control power output is determined by disconnect status L paws DE ZADE Single External Power Supply Class 2 External 24VDC Power Supply 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C Download the AOP Download and install the AOP for RSLOGIX5000 from the Service and Support website 1 Open an Internet Explorer and enter the following URL http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp kron De Dh scot sewes BA Rewwte Access Logon SS Biternase trey Procol tomato teden Gockel asemaan Rockwell ange Automation _ RSLOGIX 5000 ADD ON PROFILES Step 1 upgestions for downloading Pi of sf ef of Bd H oot of ot ot 2 From the list of the Add On I O Modules Profiles scroll down and select Bulletin 290E 291E 294E ArmorStart LT from the list and download the file 5 Das of 0 3 To download the file your RSLOGIX 5000 Serial Number will be prompted Enter the Serial Number and click on the Qualify For Update button to proceed RSLOGIX 5000 ADD ON PROFILES Step 2 of 3 Enter Qualification Information Please provide the following information to qualify the add on profile you requested Software Serial Number From the original disks Serial Number required Important Note Only a ser
8. Parameter Number 53 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 54 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 55 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 117 Chapter 4 118 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters OutNetlidleValue This parameter determines the state that starter outputs assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 56 OutNetldleState is set to 0 0 0FF 1 0N Input00Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 0 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input01Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 1 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input02Function This parameter determin
9. the braid wires um 6E Ground Bushing v T2 O W W T3 OE PE O ee One or More y Ground Leads lp oe Metal locknut bonds the Drain wires pulled back in a 360 pattern connector to the panel around the ground cone of the connector ATTENTION Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE compliant installations Electromagnetic The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance Compatibility EMC General Notes Bulletin 294E only e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emissions as well as capacitive currents CE conformity of ArmorStart LT with EMC directive does not guarantee the entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e The EMI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore ArmorStart LT must only be applied in installations that are solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 filter this product may draw more that 3 5 mA of leakage current The controller must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Grounding should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit
10. 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 WarningEnable Parameter Number 43 s Access Rule GET SET This parameter enables a warning by setting the bit to 1 Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0xC044 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 514 3 0 X Reserved UnderPowerWarn X X X Reserved X DriveParamlnit X X XxX X xX Reserved X UnswitchedPwrWarn X Config Warning ProtectFitReset Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET This parameter resets a Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1 Data Type BOOL 0 NoAction G Starter Prot di 0 gt 1 ResetFault roup arter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 RunNetFitAction Parameter Number 45 PR eee Access Rule GET SET This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 46 RunNetFitValue defines Data Type BOOL how the starter will respond when a network fault occurs as determined Group Starter Protection 0 GoToFaultValue Units an 1 HoldLastState Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 139 Chapter 4 140 Bulletin 290
11. SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures Val dod IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product General Precautions In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood gt el eD ATTENTION This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices The user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology configuration procedures required equipment and safety precautions WARNING The National Electrical Code NEC NFPA79 and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the information in this manual Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the ArmorStart LT or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The controller contains ESD electrostatic discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or re
12. Sensor Operating Voltage Range 19 2 26V DC Input Bounce Filter Off On or On Off 0 5 ms 64 ms Software Configurable Filtering 100 ps DeviceLogix 1 0 Response 2 ms 500 Hz Supply Voltage Switched Power A1 A2 Type of Outputs DC sourcing Load Types Resistive or light inductive Utilization Category IEC DC 1 DC 13 Output State Normally Open N 0 Connection Type Single keyed M12 quick disconnect Output per Connection T each Overcurrent Protection Output 1 5 A the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value Rated Insulation Voltage U UL 1500V AC IEC 2000V AC Rated Operating Voltage U 19 2 26 4V DC Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC Nominal Operating Current 500 mA per point Maximum Thermal Current fe 500 mA per point Maximum Off state Leakage Current 1pA Maximum Number of Outputs 6 Surge Suppression Input ON to OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module If an output exceeds 1 5 A for greater than 7 ms a fault is generated Integrated diode to protect against switching loads Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 167 Chapter6 Specifications Environmental Ratings Operating Temperature Range 20 50 C 4 4 122 F Storage and Transportation Temperature Range 25 85 C 13 185 F Altitude 2000 m H
13. Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Trip Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value Parameter Number 24 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Trip Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Trip Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 SnapShotLAvgAmps Parameter Number 26 Access Rul GET This parameter provides a snapshot of foes average of 3 Phase currents at time Data Type INT of last trip Group Trip Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 SnapShot Thermal Parameter Number 27 Access Rul GET This parameter provides a snapshot of the peri percentage of Thermal Capacity used at Data Type USINT time of last trip Group Trip Status Units Percent Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Basic Configuration Group FLASetting Parameter Number 28 Access Rul GET SET The motor s full load current rating is TEA 4 programmed in this parameter Data Type INT Group Basic Configur
14. Communication Override parameter The following information describes the varying levels of operation e If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled the ONLY time DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I O connection with a master i e the master is in Run mode At all other times DeviceLogix will be running the logic but will NOT control the state of the outputs If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run mode and if a network fault occurs If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled the device does not need any I O connection to run the logic As long as there are switched and unswitched power sources connected to the device the logic will control the state of the outputs DeviceLogix Local Control Mode In local control mode the embedded DeviceLogix logic engine drives the local outputs and motor run jog commands from a local DeviceLogix program Local Control is completely independent of the any or all CIP connections I O and or Explicit Message connections can exist in any state and they do not affect the user outputs or the run jog commands for the motor Local control mode is chosen by when the keypad Auto LED is on Network Override is set Communication Override is set and DeviceLogix is enabled 1 0 Networked Control Mode In I O networked control mode local outputs a
15. Table 9 Cord grip for Motor Power and Control Recommended Thomas and Betts Cord Grips for G1 and G3 Glands Thomas and Betts Part Nos Knockout Sealing Description Gland Size Cable Diameter Range in 2 Cord Grip Ring Lock Nut Motor Source Brake G1 0 75 in 0 500 0 750 2932NM 5263 1421B Motor Source Brake G1 0 75 in 0 660 0 780 2675 5263 1421B Power G1 1 0in 0 660 0 780 2676 5264 143 Power G1 1 0 in 0 770 0 895 2677 5264 143 n Power Motor souree G M20 0 236 0 473 CC IS020 6 o GMN M20 3 Phase Power G3 M25 0 512 0 709 CC 1S025 G o GMN M25 Contact Thomas and Betts for product selection details Shield Terminating Connectors The cable connector selected must provide good 360 contact and low transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at both the motor and the ArmorStart LT for electrical bonding SKINTOP MS SC MS SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT PG adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating gland Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 61 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Figure 36 Terminating the Shield with a Connector Metal connector body makes direct contact with Braid wires pulled back in a 360 pattern around the ground cone of the connector
16. Conductor Size AWG Maximum Rating Fuse or Inverse Time Circuit Breaker amperes 14 60 12 80 10 100 8 150 6 200 The following text and Figure 60 provide an explanation of 7 2 10 4 1 and 2 In the following the text not relevant to Figure 58 is replaced by ellipsis points Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an underlined letter in parentheses This underlined letter in the following text corresponds to the letter in Figure 60 7 2 10 4 Two or more motors a and their control equipment b shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit c where short circuit and ground fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses d provided the following conditions under 1 and 2 are met 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection e 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7 2 10 4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit f Summarizing the requirements relevant to Figure 58 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed in a single branch circuit provided 1 all the motor controllers are listed for group installation 2 the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating th
17. Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 59 Chapter 2 60 Installation and Wiring Figure 34 Unshielded Multi Conductor Cable Filler PVC Outer Sheath oO Single Ground Conductor Shielded Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable An acceptable shielded cable will have 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Figure 35 Shielded Cable with Four Conductors Recommended Cable Connectors Glands Choose cable connectors or glands that offer the best cable protection shield termination and ground contact Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Recommended Cord Grips The following are recommended cord grips to be used for ArmorStart LT installations
18. V Unswitched A3 red Pin 2 V Common A2 black Pin 3 Not used green Pin 4 Not used blank Pin 5 V Switched A1 blue Pin 6 Not used white Pin 1 L1 black Pin 2 L2 white Pin 3 L3 red Pin 4 Ground green yellow Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Optional Locking Clip The locking clip is an optional device that can be used if desired The clam shell design clips over power quick disconnect connections to limit customer access to disconnection Figure 37 SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT connect or disconnect power or motor connections while power is applied to ArmorStart LT Proper Lock Out Tag Out procedures A should be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury SHOCK HAZARD The ArmorStart LT local disconnect will only isolate the motor power and remove switched power when turned OFF Power inputs must be switched OFF properly from their respective sources before connection or disconnection of incoming power Proper Lock Out Tag Out procedures should be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 65 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Notes 66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 IP Address Class A Class B Class C Chapter 3 Product Commissioning The IP address identifies each node on the IP network or system of connected networks Each TCP IP node on a network must have a
19. s overload protection is programmable via the communication network providing the user with greater flexibility The Bulletin 290E 291E includes programmable overload Class 10 15 and 20 protection The Bulletin 294E provides overload protection 150 for 60s and 200 for 3s Refer to Chapter 6 Specifications for additional information Full Voltage Start This method is used in applications requiring across the line starting in which full inrush current and locked rotor torque are realized The ArmorStart LT Bulletin 290E offers full voltage starting and Bulletin 291E offers full voltage starting for reversing applications from 0 5 Hp 0 37 kW to 5 Hp 3 kW at 480Y 277V AC 3 phase power Figure 11 Full Voltage Start 100 Percent Voltage Time seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Mode of Operation Bulletin 294E Product Overview Chapter 1 Sensorless Vector Performance Using a distributed AC drive to operate mechanical equipment at optimum speed helps reduce energy costs and eliminates mechanical wear and tear that can occur in the mechanical parts The advance monitoring found in ArmorStart LT protects critical equipment against unplanned downtime with advanced diagnostics and notification of irregular operating parameters ArmorStart LT provides open loop speed regulation V Hz with slip compensation This provides excellent speed regulation and high levels of t
20. 2 No No On Phase Short This fault is a result of the drive s Phase to 1 Check the wiring between the drive and motor PF 4M Codes Ground Short faults Codes 38 40 or 2 Check motor for grounded phase 38 43 Phase to Phase Short faults Codes 3 Replace ArmorStart LT if fault cannot be cleared 41 43 3 Yes No On Under Power Trip The ArmorStart LT detected switched or Check control voltage wiring and proper polarity A1 unswitched power dip below 19 2 V for A2 terminal Correct power loss or disable fault using greater than 50 ms or 13 V for greater ProtectFltEnable Parameter 42 than 4 ms 4 No No On Sensor Short Trip This error indicates a shorted sensor Correct isolated or remove wiring error prior to shorted input device wiring input restarting the system mistakes 5 Drive No On Over Current This fault is a result of the drive s HW 1 Check for excess load improper BoostSelect Controlled PF4M Codes 12and OverCurrent fault or it s SW OverCurrent Parameter 86 setting or other causes of excess 63 fault current or 2 Check load requirements and SWCurrentTrip Parameter 83 setting 6 No No On Non Volatile Memory This is a major fault which renders the 1 If the fault was initiated by a transient power Trip ArmorStart LT inoperable Possible causes cycling may clear the problem PF 4M Code 100 of this fault are transients induced during 2 This fault may be reset by a SetToDefaults Non Volatile Storage NVS r
21. Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Figure 54 Skip Frequency Band Command Frequenc gt quency Frequency Drive Output Frequency 2x Skip Skip Frequency gt DCBrakeTime Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor Refer to Parameter 76 DCBrakeLevel DCBrakeLevel Defines the maximum DC brake current in amps applied to the motor when Parameter 32 StopMode is set to either 0 RAMP or 2 DC BRAKE Frequency Band For 0 5 Hp units Min 0 Max 2 7 Default 1 For 1 0 Hp units Min 0 Max 4 5 Default 1 For 2 0Hp units Min 0 Max 7 5 Default 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Time Parameter Number 75 Related Parameters 32 76 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units X X SECS Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Setting of sie Continuous Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 76 Related Parameters 32 75 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Amps Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Hp Dependant Default Value Hp Dependant Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 ATTENTION DC Injection Braking Mode Ramp to Stop Mode Voltage DC Brake Time Volts Speed DC Brake Level e Ifa hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an
22. IT Save this password in your password list The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name Administrator The factory default password is blank The user is expected to change the password to avoid unauthorized access Figure 49 Network Configurations Network Configuration Values marked with will be used after next restart Ethernet Interface Configuration Dynamic DHCP w a IP Address 10 10 10 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Primary Name Server wor Secondary Name Server poor SSSR Default Domain Name Host Name Ethernet Link Configuration P1 Ethernet Link Configuration P2 From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration For example in the above image the IP address will be changed to 10 10 10 101 Choose APPLY Changes for new settings to take effect Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 75 Product Commissioning Parameter Configuration ArmorStart LT embedded web server provides the user the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having to access RSLogix 5000 To view the device configuration from the web server select the parameters folder Figure 50 Basic Status Network Config Starter Protect N User I O Config N Misc Config N Starter Display Y Starter Setup F Home Parameter Name Data Type Value Unit Ga Parameters 5 Basic Status 106 FLA Setting INT 5 Amps F Network Config 107 Overload
23. InternalFreq MinimumFreq Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously MaximumFreq Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the highest frequency the drive will output Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 33 Related Parameters 1 2 36 37 72 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Speed Control Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 34 Related Parameter 1 2 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Speed Control Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 35 Related Parameter 1 2 34 35 139 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Speed Control Units Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 135 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters AccelTime1 Parameter Number 36 Related Parameters 33 37 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases g Access Rule GET SET Maximum Freq Freg Accel Rate Accel Time Data Type UINT Parameter 35 Group Speed Control enim Freq Units X X SECS Minimum Value 0 0 Speed Maximum Value 600 0 0 Acel fa Time wl Decel Default Value 10 0 0 Time1 Time 1 DecelTime1 Para
24. PhaseL3Current PhaseL3Current OutputVoltage AverageCurrent AverageCurrent DCBusVoltage ThermalUtilized ThermalUtilized DriveTemperature SwitchedVolts SwitchedVolts SwitchedVolts OutputSourceV OutputSourceV OutputSourceV UnswitchedVolts UnswitchedVolts UnswitchedVolts SensorSourceV SensorSourceV SensorSourceV Analog Consumed Network Data AnalogDeviceln AnalogDeviceln AnalogDeviceln Analog Produced Network Data AnalogDeviceOut IPS Units AnalogDeviceOut Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 AnalogDeviceOut 235 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E Example Configuration Hardware amp Software Versions Used in this example RSLogix 5000 Revision 19 Download AOP from the Support website http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp Hardware 294E FD2P5Z G1 ArmorStart LT 1606 XLP72E Power Supply 1783 EMSO8TA Stratix Ethernet switch 1756 L63 system set Control Logix 1756 EN2TR EtherNet IP module for Control Logix The IP address of the Hardware will be preset to as followed Item Description IP Address 1 ArmorStart LT 192 168 1 36 2 1756 EN2TR 192 168 1 32 3 PC 192 168 1 89 e The Armorstart LT control power wiring example used Figure 1 Control Power Wiring Example ArmorStart LT Switched Control Power
25. UDINT Multicast starting address 10 Get Set SelectAcd BOOL Activates the use of ACD 11 LastConflictDetected Structure of USINT AcdActivity USINT 6 RemoteMAC USINT 28 ArpPdu The following common services will be implemented for the TCP IP Interface Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4C No Yes Get_And_Clear Ethernet Link Object CLASS CODE 0x00F6 The following class attributes will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 3 2 Get Max Instance UINT 2 3 Get Number of Instances UINT 2 Two instances of the Ethernet Link Object will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 10 or 100 Mbit Sec 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD See ENet IP Specification 3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 USINTs MAC Address 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 4 Get Interface Counters Struct of In Octets In Ucast packets In NUcast packets In Discards In Errors In Unknown Protos Out Octets Out Ucast packets Out NUcast packets Out Discards Out Errors 5 Get Media Counters Struct of Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collisions SQE Test Errors Deferred Transmits Late Collisions Excessive Collisions MAC Transmit Errors Carrier
26. exceeds IEC 61800 5 1 Resistance to Shock Non Operational 50 G exceeds IEC 61800 5 1 Operational 2 5 G MIL STD 810G exceeds IEC 61800 5 1 Resistance to Vibration Non Operational 5 G MIL STD 810G exceeds IEC 61800 5 1 Disconnect Lock Out Maximum of 3 8 in 9 5 mm diameter lock shackle or hasp Disconnect LOTO Locks Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported Disconnect Mechanical Life 200 000 operations Power Terminals Motor Terminals Control Terminals PE Ground Source Brake 2 18 10 AWG 18 10 AWG 2 18 10 AWG 2 16 10 AWG 16 10 AWG Wire Size 0 8 5 2 mm per 0 8 5 2 mm per 0 8 5 2 mm per 1 3 5 2 mm per 1 0 4 0 mm per terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal Wire Type Multi strand copper wire P A 18 2 bein 4 8 2 bein Tightening Torque 10 6 2 Ibein 1 2 0 2 Nem 2 0 2Nem 0 5 0 2Nem Wire Strip Length 0 35 0 01 in 9 2 mm Power Rating 600V AC 25 Amp 600V AC 10 Amp 600V AC 10 Amp 600V AC 10 Amp Emission and Immunity Ratings Conducted EN 55011 Radiated Class Group 2 Emission Electrostatic Discharge AV contact 8 kV air f ooa EN 61800 3 Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10V m 80 MHz 1 GHz 2 kV Power Fast Transient 2 kV PE n 1 kV Communication and control Immunity Surge Transient 1 KV 12 Lu 2 KV 2 y earth Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance 10V 150 kHz 80 MHz When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of sa
27. to the product Specifications Chapter 6 for maximum branch fuse and circuit breaker ratings Select the motor branch circuit protection device that complies with NFPA70 NEC or NFPA79 and any other governing regional or local codes The installer shall observe the product nameplate markings and not apply the ArmorStart LT where the maximum perspective short circuit current is exceeded The ArmorStart LT shall be applied to a solidly grounded WYE power distribution system that does not exceed 480V AC 60 Hz or 400V AC 50 Hz WARNING Do not install the ArmorStart LT where the maximum available fault current exceeds the product rating 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Typical System Example The primary function of ArmorStart LT is to control and protect a three phase squirrel cage induction motor Three phase power enters through terminals that are connected to a manually operated disconnect switch The three phase power may also connect internally to an optional three phase to 24V DC power supply IPS Wired in series with the disconnect is an electrically operated contactor or a variable frequency drive For Bulletin 294E an optional source brake contactor may also be connected to the disconnect output terminals The source brake contactor is used to control an electromechanical brake physically attached to the motor The microcontroller and interface circuits are containe
28. 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 10 09 2010 4 32 AM 09 08 2010 8 09 PM 10 The RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup window will be shown Click Next to continue ie RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Welcome to the RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Wizard The ASLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Wizard provides for the installation of these groups of RSLogx 5000 Module Profiles Rockwell Automation AimorStart LT Module Profiles 1 021 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 239 Appendix C Appendix C 240 Using DeviceLogix 11 Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click on Next ie RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Rev 11 2009 IMPORTANT READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal contract between you either an individual or a single entity You or Licensee and Rockwell Automation Inc Rockwell Automation for the software product or products that Rockwell Automation licenses to You which includes computer software and may include associated media Software Rockwell Automation may also license to You printed materials and online or electroni
29. 1 1 7 6 A 24V DC 291E FAZ ArmorStart LT Reverser 0 24 3 5 A 24V DC 291E FBZ ArmorStart LT Reverser 1 1 7 6 A 24V DC 294E FVD1P5Z ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 0 5 Hp 294E FVD2P5Z ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 1 Hp 294E FVD4P2Z ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 2 Hp 290E FAP ArmorStart LT DOL 0 24 3 5 A IPS 290E FBP ArmorStart LT DOL 1 1 7 6 A IPS 291E FAP ArmorStart LT Reverser 0 24 3 5 A IPS 291E FBP ArmorStart LT Reverser 1 1 7 6 A IPS Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 83 Chapter 3 84 Product Commissioning Catalog Number AOP Description 294E FVD1P5P ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 0 5 Hp IPS 294E FVD2P5P ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 1 Hp IPS 294E FVD4P2P ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 2 Hp IPS The AOP presents an organized view of parameters within groups and specific functional pages All of the parameters are distributed within the AOP pages Each page includes basic information that must be reviewed by the user In addition within each page there are capabilities that can be accessed using the advance buttons General Connection Motor Protection amp Control Speed Control User 1 0 Fault Configuration S Status Fault Status Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Overload Current Current Limit Motor Control Swpmode Ramp Tost 7 Status Offline The AOP page below is an exa
30. 15 Hot Cold 4 fo E He 2 w g Xx e 9 EL Ek lt 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Full Load Current Class 20 Approximate Trip Time s 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Full Load Current 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Specifications Chapter 6 Bulletin 100 K 104 K Life Load Curves Electrical life Ue 400 460V AC AC 3 Switching of squirrel cage motors while starting 0 1 Contact Life millions of operations 0 01 Rated Current le AC 3 A Electrical life Ue 400 460V AC AC 4 Stepping of squirrel cage motors 10 0 1 Contact Life millions of operations 0 1 Rated Current e AC 4 A Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 171 Chapter6 Specifications Bulletin 294E Electrical Ratings Application Three phase Number of Poles 3 Input Power Terminals L1 L2 L3 Motor Power Terminals T1 T2 T3 Power Circuit PE Earth Ground Terminal 4 PE terminals Maximum Rated Operating Voltage 400Y 230 480Y 277 15 10 Rated Impulsed Voltage Wimp 4kV Dielectric Withstand UL 1960V AC IEC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Electrical Ratings Variable Frequency Drive Cat No Hp kW Input Amps I
31. 2012 Product Commissioning Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Table of Contents Recommended Cord Grips yescayes yas a ae 61 Shield Terminating Connectors casa ve tees car ee auelonamw es 61 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 0 cee ee eee e eee 62 General Notes Bulletin 294E only 2 cee e cece eee e eens 62 Ethernet DeviceNet and I O Connections 0ceceeeeeeee 63 ArmorConnect Power Media Receptacles 00 eee ee scene eee 64 Optional Locking Clipicsvigisna lire aastrhrshea eit muntneyineeyens 65 Chapter 3 e Fa fc ee eee ee a a Lee Cerne See eee 67 Gateway Address foes Eoee E Guam cad ee ae a a 67 Subnet Masks stitial tien tite Pesos NG attach ee teres 67 Configuring EtherNet IP Addresses cieparicale aw hig ntenarwke a sarvratra gs 68 Manually Configure the Network Address Switches 68 Static Address Altethatives sy sia xia chon Seis Se ewes 69 Using the Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP Utility 69 Save the Relation ists soseird peta oc Gee ess evenes aus 72 Embedded Web Server aes wah olawe ng whee rebes pikes Orato eedniee 74 Network Configuration j 4 as 29 pSkiksm tn get dasenens Pavers 75 Parameter Configurationy ovi4so ate sania epeyeege aweses eacernes 76 E mail Notification Gonhiguration g4 0 29 acsdee eeays ts eke 76 How to Add a New Module Using the Add On Profile 78 El ctronie Kejing stata j in stomidee etanima naan a
32. 6A has detected an Overload Trip Trip Snapshot SnapShotL1Amps 1 11 Amps SnapShotL2Amps 2 22 Amps SnapShotL3Amps 3 33 Amps SnapShotAveAmps 2 22 Amps SnapShot Thermal 55 Overload Trip Load has drawn excessive current based on the trip class selected ArmorStart LT 291E Test Unit Device Description Latest AB On Machine Offering Device Location Contract Info Sixth Floor Comms Lab Contact 1 Info Slicia Turnbull in California Contact 2 Info Steve Plummer on Friday Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 77 Chapter3 Product Commissioning How to Add a New Module Using the Add On Profile 78 ArmorStart LT is provided with an Add On Profile AOP An Add on profile streamlines the programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring the device tags and providing an easy to use configuration interface In addition the copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs with RSLogix 5000 revision 17 01 or later There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20 0 Update RSLogix 5000 to 20 1 or greater IMPORTANT __ Ifyour version of RSLogix 5000 does not include the AOP for ArmorStart LT it can be installed from http support rockwellautomation com controlflash LogixProfiler asp 1 Launch RS Logix 5000 Configuration and Programming of the Logix5000 Family of Controllers This program is protected by U S and inter
33. Automation Support ss ssssecesreerrerere Back Cover Installation Assistance sssssrreuuseerrrrrrrrreree Back Cover New Product Satisfaction Return 0cceceeceeneee Back Cover Documentation Feedback 0 0ccccucucuceesecuess Back Cover Trademark Dista 54 oh ee eh EE a arin a gi Back Cover Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Description Chapter 1 Product Overview ArmorStart LT is available with Full Voltage Full Voltage Reversing or Variable Speed motor control performance It comes equipped with a UL Listed At motor disconnect that supports a lock out tag out LOTO provision ArmorStart LT is listed as suitable for group installations per UL and can be applied with either branch circuit breaker protection or fuse protection It provides a robust IP66 UL Type 4 120 enclosure suitable for water washdown environments in a single box construction that will minimize inventory needs All external connections are made from the bottom of the unit minimizing accidental contact by moving equipment ArmorStart LT as a standard will come with quick disconnect receptacles for the I O and network connections And finally ArmorStart LT will include DeviceLogix a high performing local logic engine when a fast I O response is critical to the application ArmorStart LT leverages the capabilities of the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture so you can achieve an unmatched level of integration
34. CC J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller is applied within its own ratings Supplementary Note 1 The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating permitted by 7 2 10 4 2 to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit Selecting a Class CC J or T fuse with a rating of 45 amperes being less than 60 amperes also protects the conductors see Requirement 2 Although the ArmorStart LT products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A future controllers may have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A In this case the maximum rating of fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors 60 A The maximum rating permitted for the controller 45 A is a maximum rating and can be reduced for more conservative protection provided nuisance opening of the fuses do not occur Supplementary Note 2 In this appendix a fuse having a rating of any class means a fuse having the let through characteristics of an Class RK 5 fuse Class RK 5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let through of any class of fuse For this reason the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with fuses without a restriction to a particular class have been tested with and are intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK 5 Of course fuses of a class that have lower let throughs than Class RK 5 such as Class CC J or T are also acceptable A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to th
35. Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters SetToDefaults This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults 0 NoAction 1 SetToDefaults Advanced Configuration AccelTime2 When active sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog Maximum Freq _ Accel Rate Accel Time Parameter 35 Maximum Freq 0 Time2 Time 2 DecelTime2 When active sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog Maximum Freq _ Decel Rate Decel Time Parameter 35 Maximum Freq 0 l Acel i Time w Decel Parameter Number 68 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 69 Related Parameters 36 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units X X Secs Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 70 Related Parameters 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units X X SECS Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 146 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Motor0LRetention Enables disables the Motor overload Retention function When Enabled the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power down and restored at power up A change to this parameter settin
36. Enter a File name for the Relation List for example Control System Configuration and click Save You can leave the Save as type at the default setting Bootp You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session When DHCP is enabled factory default Enabled the unit will request its network configuration from a DHCP BOOTP server Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non volatile memory The unit will try to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server If the server is not present e g server fails to power up the unit will use the IP address it previously received from the server The DHCP timeout 30 s Be cautious about using an unmanaged switch to assign the IP address A DHCP server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address The possibility exists that the ArmorStart LT would be assigned a different IP address which would cause a stop in communication with the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 73 Chapter 3 Embedded Web Server Product Commissioning The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data IMPORTANT To access the internal web browser open your computer s internet browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart LT for example 192 168 1 1 personnel The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized If the login and password a
37. Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n 9 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Idle Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 10 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n Note There are no protection fault attributes Behavior for protection faults is go to OFF Instance 3 will drive protection fault and communication fault idle behaviors for user outputs Instance 3 will have the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 6 4 Get Binding Array of UINT 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 Get Set Command BOOL 0 Idle 1 Run 7 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n 9 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Idle Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 10 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value Attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0n Control Supervisor Object The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single CLASS CODE 0x0029 No class attributes are supported A single instance Instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 215 Appendix B CIP Information
38. GET Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxE3BF Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 4 3 0 X OverloadTrip PhaseLossTrip UnderPowerTrip X SensorShortTrip X PhaselmbalanceTrip X NonVolMemoryTrip X Reserved X Jamtrip StallTrip UnderloadTrip xX XxX xX Reserved X OutputShortTrip X UserDefinedTrip X HardwareFltTrip The highlighted functions are enabled by default WarningStatus Parameter Number 43 This parameter provides the current AES oF warning condition Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0xC295 Default Value Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 113 Chapter 4 114 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 41 3 0 X OverloadWarning Reserved UnderPowerWarn X Reserved X PhasImbalanceWarn X X Reserved JamWarning X Reserved X UnderloadWarning X X X X
39. Installation Precautions Precautions for Bulletin 290E 291E Applications Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications Dimensions 40 The following statements must be read and understood ATTENTION The earth ground terminal shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low impedance connection ATTENTION Copper ground conductors are recommended The ArmorStart LT external protective earth PE pad is aluminum Refer to your local electrical installation standard for proper bonding and protection when dissimilar metals are used gt components or reduce product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or out of range ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage disconnect switch prior to connecting and disconnecting cables Risk of shock A SHOCK HAZARD To prevent electrical shock open appropriate machine environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles to discharge after removal of mains supply Before working on drive ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs L1 L2 L3 Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death SHOCK HAZARD The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time ArmorStart LT consists of three components that are non replace
40. Instance Service Name 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Discrete Output CLASS CODE 0x001E Group Object No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Output Group DOP object Instance 1 3 exists for all ArmorStart LT units Instance 1 exists for the sole purpose of providing a place holder for the Comm Override and Network Override parameters Instance 1 will contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 8 for DOL Soft Starter Bulletin 290E 291E 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 12 for Inverters Bulletin 294E 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP Instances 6 Get Set Command BOOL 0 Idle 1 Run 0 No override go to safe state 104 Get Set Network Status Overrride BOOL 1 Override run local logic 105 Get Set Comm Status Overrride BOOL 0 E No Override go to safe state 1 Override run local logic 214 Instance 2 controls the communication fault and idle behaviors for run jog outputs Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT T E a E i z Binding fray ofUNT 19 10 o Dries Buletin 254 6 Get Set Command BOOL 0 Idle 1 Run 7 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set
41. LED REV LED Set FWD LED AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAND If no fault Motor On OFF Ignore Motor Off Motor Off PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Ignore Motor Off With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 0 Momentary pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch Current Mode Key Press OFF HAND AUTO NO KEY PRESSED Motor Off FWD REV FWD LED Set REV LED REV LED Set FWD LED AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAND If no fault Motor On OFF Motor Off Motor Off PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Motor Off Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function Bulletin 294E only The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog function allows for local start stop control with capabilities to jog in forward reverse motor directions Figure 15 Bulletin 294E Jog Forward Reverse HOA A JOG Wai 2 l l zey a Keypad Local Control i Yo HAND i AUTO With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 1 Maintained pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch Current Mode Key Press OFF HAND JOG AUTO NOKEVPRESSED T T l T FWD REV FWD LED Set REV LED FWD LED Set REV LED REV LED Set FWD LED REV LED Set FWD LED JOG If no fault Jog Motor AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAN
42. P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Figure 52 E mail Notification Configuration F Home a Parameters 5 Basic Status F Network Config F starter Protect F user 1 0 Config F Misc config D Drive IO Config GQ Diagnostics F Diagnostic Overview 5 Protection Trip Status F Network Settings F Ethernet Statistics F Ring Statistics Qi Miscellaneous i Administrative Settings 5 Device Identity F Network Configuration F E mail Configuration 5 Password Configuration P EDs File E mail triggers Device Identi Network Configuration E mail Configuration Password Configuration E mail Notification E mail Recipient E mail Sender SMTP Server SMTP Username SMTP Password SMTP Port 25 Send an e mail message when any of the following faults or warnings are declared or cleare Faults I short Circuit Wamings I control Power Fio I Phase Inbalance I overload I Phase Short I Ground I DeviceNet I stall I Hardware I control Power Fio e when a trip occurs e when a trip is cleared e when a warning occurs e when a warning is cleared IMPORTANT Cleared Event e mails will only be sent when all events have been cleared and if a trip event e mail has previously been sent The following is an example trip e mail Subject Body Trip Type Trip Info Device Name ArmorStart LT 291E 1 1 7
43. Straight Male Right Angle Example Cat No 1585D M4TBDE 3 CATSe Patch Cable IP20 RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male Example Cat No 1585J M4TB 4 Control Power Media Patchcords PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 889N F65GFNM 5 Control Power Tees The E stop In Tee Cat No 898N 653ST NKF is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On Machine Stop station using a control power media patchcord Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 6 The E stop Out tee Cat No 898N 653ES NKF is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller 7 Control Power Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Cat No 888N D65AF1 8 Three Phase Power Trunk Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 280 PWRM35A M 9 Three Phase Drop Cable PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Cat No 280 PWRM22A M 10 Three Phase Power Tees and Reducer Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors Cat No 280 135 Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line Mini to trunk Quick change connector Cat No 280 RT35 Reducer connects from quick change male connector to mini female connector Cat No 280 RA35 11 Three Phase Power Receptacles Female re
44. Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT Alarm Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD 3 Get Help Text STRING See Tables below 222 The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single The table below lists Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings Table 35 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT Warning Code Warning Text Help Text 1 Warning 1 2 Warning 2 3 Motor Overload Overload warning level has been exceeded Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Table 35 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT Help Text Indicates missing supply phase This fault can be disabled Motor current has exceeded jam warning level Motor current dropped below Underload Warning level Indicates the control power has dipped below 19 Volts Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply Indicates the internal power supply is below its optimal level Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only Warning Code Warning Text 4 Warning 4 5 Warning 5 6 Jam Warning 7 Underload Warning 8 Warning 8 9 Warning 9 10 Wa
45. Tags at the Controller Organizer Controller Organizer SJ Controller Armorstart_LT_Test Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler amp Tasks 3 f MainTask oe MainProgram Unscheduled Programs Phases amp Motion Groups C Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions amp Data Types CR User Defined H Cp Strings Ci Add On Defined Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 249 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 21 Expand the output tag of the ArmorStart LT i e Armorstart_LT_36 0 Armorstart_LT_36 C faas Armorstart_LT_36 1 fias Armorstart_LT_36 0 Tikk Armorstart_LT_36 0 Accel2 Armorstart_LT_36 0 Decel2 O O w w w Armorstart_LT_36 0 FreqgCommand 300 Armorstart_LT_36 0 Int00Deviceln 0 Armorstart_LT_36 0 JogForward o 22 Enter the following value Description Armorstart_LT_36 0 Freqcommand 30 0Hz Setting Target Frequency Armorstart_LT_36_0 RunForward 1 Start the RUNning in Forward Direction 23 Toggle the Armorstart_LT_36_O RunForward to move the motor in the forward direction Then toggle Armorstart_LT_36_O RunReverse The motor will run in the reverse direction 24 Change the value of the FreqCommand to vary the speed Note Setting the tag value to 500 instructs the drive to run at 50 0Hz General Status Connection Module Info Motte Protection amp Control Speed Control User 1 0 LPH P2 rmo Fau Configuration Raring Forverd s san
46. X Out02 X Out03 X Out04 X Out05 X Accel2 X Decel2 AuxlOStatus Parameter Number 8 Status of the hardware Access Rule ot input output points Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F Default Value 0 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 41 3 Pt00 Pt01 Pt02 X Pt03 X Pt04 X Pt05 XIXIXIXIX X X X Reserved NetworkStatus Parameter Number 9 The parameter provides the status Access Rule ot of the network connections Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxDF Default Value 0 Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 41 3 ExplicitCnxn l0Connection ExplicitCnxnFit X 10CnxnFault X 10Cnxnidle X Reserve X DLREnabled X DLRFIt X X X X X X Reserved DLXControlStatus Parameter Number 10 The parameter provides the DeviceLogix Access Rule ga Control Status Data Type UINT a Go iiss Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Ox1FFF Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 127 Chapter4 Bulletin 290 291E 294E Programmabl
47. a mm El il Oto Intemet Protocol Frequency Pott Configuration f t He Hees Lets LPNA IPS Auto j mH aster User 1 0 Miscellaneous Data Unt Data Name ArmorStart 294 1 6 Output Current Minis 8 SwatchedVoktage AMT Y Description Wt iN 4 Location Output Vokage HHH vac Unswitched Vokage im f v MAC ID 00 00 8C 86 05 28 oceusvonage BEEE v orive temperature e Deg Maney 1 001 Buid 38 Orr SubRevi 1 050 Fan Speed fein RPM Elapsed Run Time H Hours SubRev2 2 002 Status Running Cancel Help This example configuration is now complete If additional help is needed please contact your Rockwell Automation sales representative or technical support 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At hetp www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installati
48. and ease of use The architecture of ArmorStart LT allows Premiere Integration with Allen Bradley ControlLogix or CompactLogix line of Automation Controllers and PLCs RSLogix 5000 is the only programming tool needed which consolidates controller programming device configuration and maintenance into a single integrated environment ArmorStart LT includes tools such as an Add on Profile that will automatically generate PLC tag names for quick and efficient configuration and programming The ArmorStart LT is available with options that can further reduce installation and commissioning time and cost such as e Quick disconnect receptacles for power control and motor connections e Local Hand Off Auto keypad for manual control e Internal power supply IPS eliminating the need to run additional control power to each unit e Bulletin 294 can be ordered with an electromechanical brake connection source brake e EDS Tag Generator tool with RS Logix 5000 The G2 gland option is rated IP66 UL Type 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 17 Chapter1 Product Overview Features The ArmorStart LT provides many features and benefits that are unsurpassed in the market place e Robust IP66 UL Type 4 12 enclosure e UL Listed Suitable for Group Motor Applications e UL Listed At motor disconnect switch e Native support for EtherNet IP e Embedded dual port ethernet switch e Device Level Ring DLR w
49. and their control equipment Two or more motors Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors controllers and motors Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered motor running overloads short circuit line to line faults and ground faults line to ground The short circuit fault and ground fault protection is governed by 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 and explained in Requirements 1 2 and 3 and Figure 61 The overload protection explained in Requirement 4 is governed by 7 3 1 and 7 3 1 1 Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the minimum ampacity given by 12 5 3 and 12 5 4 The method for determining this minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and Figure 62 The example branch circuit is shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62 The circuit topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of 14 AWG conductors Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and motor These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have sufficient ampacity without derating for the loads each must carry All of the wiring is customer supplied rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media because all controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option Fuses protect the branch circuit The example
50. application Bulletin 294 provides an internal EMI filter and is CE compliant For CE compliant installations refer to the recommended EMI RFI cord grip accessory For availability of the quick disconnect shielded motor cable contact your local sales representative for details Local and remote status and diagnostics ArmorStart LT offers comprehensive status and diagnostics for I O Network and device health via 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 19 Chapter1 Product Overview Network Options 20 LEDs found on the electronic control module ECM If a fault occurs a local fault reset button allows the user to quickly get the process started after corrective action is taken The user can also configure the embedded webserver to send an e mail when a fault or warning occurs Gland plate entrance ArmorStart LT offers different methods of connecting three phase control power and motor ArmorStart LT has conduit entrance openings as standard Native EtherNet IP ArmorStart LT supports native EtherNet IP without additional modules or adapters EtherNet IP allows complete integration of control with information across multiple Common Industrial Protocol CIP networks EtherNet IP allows users to integrate I O control device configuration and data collection across multiple networks enabling internet connectivity and information Embedded dual port switch ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP version
51. are ordered separately Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 ArmorStart LT Characteristics Figure 4 Bulletin 290E 291E ArmorStart LT Off i HOA Keypad optional On On Off Switch IP Address Switches LockOut TagOut Provision Status and Diagnostic LEDs am Reset 4 ECM Electronic Control Module 6 Configurable I 0s Wiring Access Dual Port EtherNet IP This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector when DeviceNet communication is selected Protective Earth PE Gland Plate Conduit Cord Grip or ArmorConnect Media optional Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 23 Chapter1 Product Overview Catalog Number Expla nation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes This basic explanation should not be used for product selection not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number 290 E Z G1 Option Option2 a b e f g h a e Bulletin Number Control Voltage Code Description Code Description 290 Full Voltage Starter Z External 24V DC control power 291 Reversing Starter P Internal power supply b f Communications Gland Plate Options Code Description Power and Motor E EtherNet IP Code Description D D
52. conductors between each controller and motor This includes the output of the variable frequency AC drive based Bulletin 294E controllers even though these drives have electronic short circuit protection According to NFPA 79 the fuse and not the drive s electronic short circuit protection provides the short circuit fault and ground fault protection for these output conductors Supplementary Note 3 Generally connecting a smaller conductor to a larger conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection This connection may be made without this fuse in some cases through the use of a tap rule that indirectly protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things the ratio of the ampacity of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the maximum length of the smaller conductor see for example 7 2 8 2 When applying 7 2 10 4 2 such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary In Figure 61 the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load conductors of any size because 7 2 10 4 does not indirectly protect the smaller conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and the conductor length Instead Table 30 protects the smallest conductor directly by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that contains a conductor of that size 3 Requirement Three Controller Short Circuit and Ground Fault Protection Each motor controller
53. copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Table 1 Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources Resource http ab rockwellautomation com Networks and Communications Description Rockwell Automation networks and communication website http ab rockwellautomation com Networks and Communications Ethernet IP Network Rockwell Automation EtherNet IP website http www rockwellautomation com services networks http www rockwellautomation com services security Rockwell Automation network and security services websites http www ab com networks architectures html Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals EtherNet IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET AP005 Describes how to install configure and maintain linear and device level Ring DLR networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNet IP devices with embedded switch technology EtherNet IP Network Configuration User Manual Publication ENET UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNet IP communication modules with a Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network EtherNet Design Consideration Publication ENET RM002A EN P Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual Publication ENET UM001
54. for Industrial Machinery From the perspective of the ArmorStart LT product family being listed for group installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers connected to it This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple motor branch circuit The circuit topology shown in Figure 58 is one configuration but not the only possible configuration of a multiple motor branch circuit In these circuits a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker protects multiple motors their controllers and the circuit conductors The motors may be any mixture of power ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor controller technologies magnetic motor controllers and variable frequency AC drive controllers This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications This is not because these products are only suitable for industrial machinery but because industrial machinery is their primary market In fact while all versions of the ArmorStart LT products may be applied on industrial machinery the versions that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed by NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NEC see ArmorStart LT Product Family In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79 motor controllers that are listed for group installation may be installed in multiple motor branch circuits according to either of two alter
55. ie getee ncaa 178 Appendix A Introductions stiano tees se Anes no nenel utartits a2 Aen one een a 2 179 ArmorStart LT Product Family oneee 180 Multiple Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Grooup Installation General 3 22354 bevseeeendeeeeeeed ren 181 Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7 2 10 4 1 MN AOA O T A inaa cI coca a Msdsant ed 183 Complete Texts das nr een eeeus aE TA EEE A 183 Explanatory Examples Ae eaa a a a E 185 Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E Controllers Ca Wie anaa Ee S a A E setae 191 Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers b 191 Combined Load Conductors c sc eevee ches oe Seite aaeendades 191 Appendix B High Level Description eni wievedinin ities beri ibb oe eeeaatd shee eS 193 Product Code and Name SHIN Grey irevjcereeaeliaee eet erares 193 CIP Explicit Connection Behavior a ciats ie ecen iden uy sab ewes 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Table of Contents EDS Piles tcf aed ae ese hs ele e Aa 194 CIP Object Requirements 552i ance cat oud ase taetere nee veneralrss 194 Identity Object srie e te te aete el sl ck ith th cia ahha diel 195 CLASS CODE 0Z000L ccsspen cies out r oea ER 195 Message Routers erener so ranna iraan EEEN EE EEE EREE 196 CLASS CODE Ox0002s 2 Secsianuetieid tee bees sautanens os 196 Assembly Object Attic heme ia Saveur Risin eva nen veges 196 CLASS CODE 020004 vacii
56. in Defaults to the value 0 response toclearing a trip 17 Optional Get V Email Send Features UINT Number of email failures detected Defaults to the value 0 18 Optional Get V Trip Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in response to a trip condition 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B The following common services will be implemented for the TCP IP Interface Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 227 AppendixB CIP Information Notes 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Appendix C Introduction Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone Boolean program that resides within the ArmorStart LT The program is embedded in the product so that there is no additional module required to use this technology DeviceLogix is programmed using the Add On Profile for RS Logix 5000 In addition to the actual programming DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program will only run if the logic has been enabled and unswitched power is present This can be done within the Logic Editor The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the Network Override and
57. kW to 2 Hp 1 5 kW 480 277V AC Local 1 0 The ArmorStart LT provides as standard 6 user configurable I O points By default all points are configured as an Input When not using the AOP the user will need to refer to parameter 49 IO PointConfiguration to define an output point When using the AOP the I O point is configured from the General screen in the Module Definition section by clicking the Change button see Figure 9 This allows user to view and configure the I O mix refer to Figure 10 Figure 9 Defining 1 0 Point Theme 1 so A a Tye INE FEZ Amedia LT Reverses A aD Vode Mandy Poot Etewee Eterret Adtbere Nee ak Pree Nemec 1301001 sna Paddon P Moa ane Pein u Gam Electors Kang Compatitte Mosse cotnonet fenton Sue Ote Cm Gee 5 Figure 10 Current 1 0 Point Configuration ne Options Series 4 Hand Oit Auto Enabled Revision if Ge Keypad Electronic Keying Compatible Module D Connection Configured By RSLogix 5000 Nd User 1 0 o 1 2 3 4 s input Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 29 Chapter1 Product Overview Mode of Operation Bulletin 290E 291E 30 Overload Protection The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller incorporates as standard electronic motor overload protection This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an 2t algorithm The ArmorStart LT
58. life of Bulletin 294 a minimum 800 uH line reactor for the group can be applied to extend total service life In addition if line disturbance mitigation is also necessary the ArmorStart LT is equipped with an EMI filter and when used with a shielded motor cable reduces the impact of the power switching components For CE compliant installations Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 294 Motor Cable Considerations Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 refer to the recommended EMI RFI cord grip accessory or quick disconnect shielded motor cable Contact your local sales representative for details If however the customer specifications require input line reactors or transformers the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution panel under one line reactor not individual reactors or transformers Keep in mind where full voltage ArmorStarts are included with VFD ArmorStarts the starting currents of the full voltage ArmorStarts can be significant The current must be accounted for in the selection of the line reactor or you run the risk of nuisance undervoltage faults of the VFD ArmorStarts while the full voltage ArmorStarts are starting their motors with a minimum of 800 uH to1200 uH line reactor Failure to follow this application requirement will result in premature product failure Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for assistance i ATTENTION For 50 C ambients
59. media for a complete plug n play solution This solution provides plug in style stop stations as shown in Figure 23 The ArmorConnect power media offers both three phase and control power cable cord set systems These include patchcords receptacles tees reducers and accessories to be utilized with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller This cable system allows quick connections and reduced installation time by utilizing pre manufactured cable assemblies for more reliable connection of the three phase and control power IMPORTANT When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers Bulletin 290E 291E and Bulletin 294E use only ArmorConnect power media The use of any other power media will void the UL Listing of the motor controller IMPORTANT Refer to your local electrical code for proper application and protection of long length power cable to minimize physical damage and appropriate short circuit and ground fault protection for the assembly Figure 23 ArmorConnect Configuration Example Motor Branch Power Supply Circuit 24VDC Protection Bul 1606 es E Stop In nd deem a E Stop Out 6 5 a J re IMPORTANT Asingle channel Stop is pictured It is necessary to perform a risk assessment and determine specific application requirements 1 CATSe Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle Example Cat No 1585A DD4JD 2 CAT5e Patch Cord IP67 M12 D Code Male
60. must be protected according to its own ratings that is applied in accordance with its listing Text 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Analysis See d in Figure 61 The characteristics of the fuse s permitted to protect the conductors see Requirement 2 must now be compared to those in the controller s ratings To comply with the listing of each motor controller and overload relay the fuse s must comply with the maximum branch circuit protection specified in the controller markings Therefore the fuse s must be of a class marked on all of the controllers and the rating of the fuse s must not exceed the rating marked on any of the controllers The markings of each controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the motor controller When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current of 5000 amperes or less the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any class When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A current between 5000 and 10000 amperes the class of the fuse must be CC J or T Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 amperes selecting a Class
61. of the same class The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment The controllers are connected to the test supply through the three phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during the tests During the test electrical faults are impressed on the output of and internal to these variable frequency AC drive based controllers Increasing the ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow through and damage the controller before the fuses open Afterwards the damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating One criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding conductor that must not open during the test as this could leave exposed conductive parts in an energized state shock hazard Another criterion is that the cotton must not ignite as this indicates the expulsion from the controller of hot gases or molten metal fragments fire hazard Referring to the controller on the left UL 508C permits the individual motor testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect an individual motor branch circuit According to both NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 this is 400 percent of the full load current rating of the largest motor tha
62. pdf Describes the required media components and how to plan for install verify troubleshoot and certify an Ethernet network Network Infrastructure for EtherNet IP Introduction and Considerations ODVA publication http www odva org Portals 0 Library Publications_Numbered PUB00035RO0_Infrastructure_Guide pdf Table 3 Product Selection Resources Resource Industrial Controls catalog website http www ab com catalogs Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNet IP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNet IP networks Description Industrial Controls catalog website ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide Publication 290 SG001 Table 4 Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources Resource http www ab com networks architectures html Product selection guide Description Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website Converged Plantwide Ethernet CPwE Design and Implementation Guide Publication ENET TD001 Rockwell Automation Support Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems The design guide is built on and adds to design guidelines from the Cisco Ethernet to the Factory EttF solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry Rockwell A
63. switch value of 888 allows the user to reset to factory default configuration including configuration parameters This setting is useful in situations where the user wishes to decommission a module or when the user wishes to commission a previously used module that has an unknown configuration When the switches are set to 888 upon the next power cycle the ArmorStart LT will return to factory default settings and cease all communications The Module Status LED shall transition to blinking red and the Network Status LED shall transition to OFF After reset the user will then need to change the IP address to a valid setting and power cycle The purpose of this is to prevent the user from resetting the module and then never changing the switch setting from 888 IMPORTANT Setting the IP address to 888 followed by a power cycle will reset the device to its factory default configuration To resume network communication the address MUST be set to DHCP or a valid IP address and power cycled again Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 69 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Using the The Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP utility is a stand alone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP DHCP software with a user Rockwell Automation friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the BootP DHCP Utility RSLogix 5000 installation CD The ArmorStart LT must have DHCP enabled factory d
64. the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the ArmorStart LT motor controllers Complete Text 7 2 10 4 Two or more motors or one or more motor s and other load s and their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit where short circuit and ground fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses provided the following conditions under 1 and either 2 or 3 are met 1 Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection or selected such that the ampere rating of the motor branch short circuit and ground fault protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7 2 10 1 for that individual motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 30 for the smallest conductor in the circuit 3 not considered in this appendix Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 183 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Table 30 Abbreviated Table 7 2 10 4 Table 7 2 10 4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short Circuit Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
65. tisteite ty etal Sates ieee ee 215 Overload Object e aea a eie ha E wanes ogee 216 CLASS GODE 0002 G saitun ar i a toe o done 216 Device Level Ring DLR Object sssssrersrerrrerrrrrrrrrrer 217 GLASS CODE Ox0047 on iria a E a ESERE EE RS 217 Extended Device Object nuns esesensrrrrererrerrrrrrererrrere 217 CLASS CODE OX0OGA pornica de a aa 217 DPI Fault Objects is iois inene i e a oan Ea sees a 218 GLASS CODE 0x0097 roroi naan eE E E E cede 218 BPI AlarhrObiecta citi ocivbead sees a a e take a 222 CLASS CODE 050098 osian aa A E EE 222 TCP IP Interface Object resine ie nev Sep eas acnenarwtactecaawid hohe 223 CLASS CODE Ox00P5 c 2c cipinincen Giiqd Lp etek ieee 223 Ethernet Link Objectos raen penne cae Aak tea ee a AE 224 CLASS CODEOXOOFG o 2 erens Ta n E a E E 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 15 Table of Contents Using DeviceLogix Support and Feedback 16 Trip and Warning Email Object i c ven eda ee Sa cece eee ees 226 CLASS CODE OOZ Orrann a de tha hha 4 sets Meee Aves 226 Appendix C Titer eo ees ocr en a Stes fh le a aaah ig te ena et 229 Device Lorix Prosramm ing reiiunievevense seine sera auatag ip iddacgrieis 230 DeviceLogix Programming Examples 2 is 06dseuevesew ee bees 230 ArmorStart LT 294E Example Configuration 4 236 Download the AOR errorae eases eben Mae ia Boo nee RS 237 Use of the AOP Profile in RSLogix s oadeadacctanguyorwgemesewdemies 242 Rockwell
66. to a null 64 chars max 3 Set Geographic Location STRING ra Assigned Geographic Loc Defaults to null 32 chars 101 Set Contacxts 1 STRING Contacts String Defaults to a null 80 chars max 102 Set Contacts 2 STRING Contacts String Defaults to a null 80 chars max DPI Fault Object The following common services will be implemented for the Extended Device Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single CLASS CODE 0x0097 This object provides access to fault information within the device The following class attributes will be supported for the DPI Fault Object Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Class Revision UINT 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4 3 Get Set Fault Cmd Write USINT 0 NOP 1 Clear Fault 2 Clear Flt Queue 4 Get Fault Instance Read UINT 7 stained etuipesthe wee Struct of Array of SnapShot parameter instance numbers 5 Get Fault into parameter instance array UINT Array Size 5 Array 5 of UINT Array of Instance Numbers 23 24 25 26 27 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of faults recorded in the fault queue 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Four instances of the DPI Fault Object will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Nam
67. to run process in the event of network interruptions e Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic DeviceLogix Programming Example The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to interface the ArmorStart with a remote hard wired startstop station In this case the I O is wired as shown in the table below Input Output Table Bit Description Pt00 Start Button Pt01 Stop Button Out02 Run Forward IMPORTANT Before programming logic it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run The conditions can be defined by setting CommsOverride and NetworkOverride to the value that you want 1 Refer to section How to Add a New Module Using the Add On Profile to configure the I O Then select the DeviceLogix section and create a program Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 10 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C Click on the DeviceLogix tab If you are on line with a device a dialog box will appear asking you to upload or download Click on Upload Click the Start Logic Editor button If programming off line continue to step 5 otherwise click on the Edit button Click Yes when asked if you want to Enter Edit Mode Once in edit mode the entire list of Function Blocks will be displayed in the toolbar Left Click on the RSL function block This is a reset dominate latch Move the
68. to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes These will vary based on country type of distribution system and other factors Periodically check the integrity of all ground connections General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge Most equipment has specific provisions to connect a safety ground or PE protective earth directly to it Grounding PE or Ground The safety ground PE must be connected to earth ground This point must be connected to an adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod a bus bar or a building ground grid Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes Some codes may require redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity IMPORTANT To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal avoid spraying moisture directly on the terminal When used in washdown environments apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro chemical corrosion x Ground connections should be inspected on a regular basis Grounding Motors The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection with a separate ground conductor It is recommended that each motor frame be grounded to building steel at
69. unique IP address The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part Networks are classified A B C or other The class of the network determines how an IP address is formatted Figure 38 IP Address on the IP Network 0 78 31 0 Net ID Host ID 0 15 16 31 10 Net ID Host ID 0 23 24 31 110 Net ID Host ID You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its dotted decimal IP address as follows Range of first integer Range of first integer 0 127 192 223 128 191 B 224 255 other C Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same class and must have the same net ID Each node on the same network must have a different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address Gateway Address The Gateway Address is the default address of a network It provides a single domain name and point of entry to the site Gateways connect individual physical networks into a system of networks Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used for splitting IP networks into a series of subgroups or subnets The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the Host ID address field into a field for subnets Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 67 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Configuring EtherNet IP Address 68 Before using the ArmorStart LT you may need to configure a
70. when the network is idle and Parameter 56 OutNetldleState is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Input00Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 0 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input01Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 1 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input02Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 2 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 60
71. 0 a user configurable timer AutoRestartDelay Parameter 85 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted No User Action Needed This type of fault requires drive or motor repair or is caused by wiring or programing errors The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared via manual or network reset A rising edge of the Fault Reset DeviceLogix bit will also clear the fault Yes ProtFitResetMode Faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away Parameter 41 1 which is automatic Table 29 Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E Blink Auto Reset Bulletin 294E Pattern Capable Disable Default Trip Status Description Action 1 Drive No On Overload Trip This fault is a result of the drive s Motor The fault may be reset only after the overload Controlled PF 4M Codes 7 and Overload fault or the Drive Overload fault algorithm determines that the motor has sufficiently 64 Exceeding the Drive overload rating of cooled or that the Drive heatsink temperature falls to 150 for 1 minute or 200 for 3 seconds an acceptable level Check the following caused the device to trip 1 Excessive motor load Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by MotorOLCurrent Parameter 30 2 Verify BoostSelect Parameter 86 setting
72. 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Group NetworkOverride This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault 0 Disable 1 Enable CommsOverride This parameter allows for local logic to override an 1 0 connection timeout 0 Disable 1 Enable KeypadMode This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary 0 Momentary 1 Maintained KeypadDisable This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons 0 KeypadEnabled 1 KeypadDisabled Parameter Number 64 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 65 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 66 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 67 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 145
73. 1 5 1 5 o 57 13 i 2 38 61 us 24 25 3849 oL Lto 1 5 ArmorConnect Internal Power ArmorConnect Source Brake Supply Gland Plate optional Gland Plate optional __ IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation mount the ArmorStart LT in the vertical orientation as shown Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 41 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Figure 17 Dimensions for Bulletin 294E 381 TAD 15 0 206 43 8 1 120 EN 4 7 Front View 202 27 8 0 o 37 5 OROR 92 9 3 7 E p 1 in conduit opening g n 19 075 in conduit opening Right Side View Line Motor 37 1 5 92 9 a ee LHI Bea 38 55 48 5 as Lt 4 25 ta 48 5 1 5 1 9 1 0 1 9 ArmorConnect Internal Power ArmorConnect Media Gland ArmorConnect Gland Entrance Supply Gland Plate optional Entrance optional with Source Brake optional B IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation mount the ArmorStart LT in the vertical orientation as shown 42 Ro
74. 1 L2 L3 Motor Terminals 11 72 73 PE Terminals 1 23 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 43 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Wiring Terminal Detail Figure 20 Gland Connection Conduit Entry Standard Inputs Outputs Gland Plate Power Network Optional ArmorConnect Quick Disconnect Feature San o Control Power Receptacle Three Phase Power Receptacle The power control and ground wire capacity and the tightening torque requirements are shown in Table 8 The maximum number of connections per terminal are shown in Table 7 As shown in Figure 21 all the terminals are found in the wiring area Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 21 ArmorStart LT Power and Control Terminals SN g Table 7 Power Control and Ground Terminal Designations Terminal Designations Wires Connections Description Al 2 Switched 24V DC Control Power Wire Strip Length 0 35 0 01 in A2 2 Control Power Common 9 0 2mm A3 2 Unswitched 24V DC Control Power PE 2 Ground L1 2 Line Power Phase A L2 2 Line Power Phase B L3 2 Line Power Phase C T 1 Motor Connection Phase A T2 1 Motor Connection Phase B TB 1 Motor Connection Phase C B1 1 Source Brake Connection B1 B2 1 Sour
75. 85 meets application needs 13 No No On Drive Hardware Fault Failure has been detected in the drive 1 Cycle power power section 2 Replace unit if failure can not be cleared 14 No No On Output Short This fault is generated when a hardware Correct isolate or remove wiring error prior to output short circuit condition is detected restarting the system 15 Yes Yes Off User Defined This fault is generated either in response This fault is generated based on user configuration to the rising edge of user input 0 5 This fault may be reset after the condition that caused Input00Function Input 05Function itis removed For example the Auxiliary Input goes Parameter 58 63 low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low 16 No No On Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious Power cycle to correct If fault persists the ArmorStart hardware problem exists This fault is LT requires replacement generated when either the PF 4M drive is not detected or an invalid factory configuration setting is detected In the case of a Disconnect open fault reclosing the disconnect will cause a reset to be issued 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Power Circuit Specifications Bulletin 290E 291E Chapter 6 Electrical Ratings Application Three phase Number of Poles 3 Input Power Terminals L1 L2 L3 Motor Power Terminals T1 T2 T3 PE Earth Ground Terminal 4 P
76. 90E 291E Starters Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved name ConnectionFault 1 Reserved name ConnectionFault 2 Reserved name ConnectionFault 3 Reserved name ConnectionFault 4 CurrentFlowing NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 DisconnectClosed KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled 6 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00 7 8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut 9 Pt15DeviceOut Pt 4DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut 10 AnalogDeviceOut low byte 11 AnalogDeviceOut high byte 12 Param 1 PhaseL1Current 13 14 Param 2 PhaseL2Current 15 16 Param 3 PhaseL3Current 17 18 Param 4 AverageCurrent 19 20 Param 5 ThermalUtilized 21 22 Param 11 SwitchedVolts OutputSourceV IPS units 23 24 Param 12 UnswitchedVolts SensorSourceV IPS units 25 26 Param 16 TripStatus 27 28 Param 17 WarningStatus 29 PLC Communication Fault Only Table 19 Bulletin 290E 291E Produced Assembly Status Tags Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style DEMO_REV Fault DEMO_REV I Fault DIN Binary DEMO_REV TripPresent DEMO_REV TripPresent BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV WarningPresent DEMO_REV 1 WarningPresent BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV RunningForward DEMO_REV I RunningForward BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV RunningRever
77. 91E or Bulletin 294E Basic parameter configuration status and diagnostic information can be accessed from the embedded web browser RSLogix 5000 is the recommended commissioning software Download the Add On Profile AOP from http support rockwellautomation com controlflash Logix Profiler asp for additional functionality There are additional capabilities that are not enabled or left at their default values Table 22 Quick Parameter Setup Bulletin 290E 291E Bulletin 294E 28 FLASetting 28 MotorNPVolts 29 OLResetLevel 29 MotorNPHertz 30 OverloadClass 30 MotorOLCurrent 49 l0PointConfiguration 32 StopMode 34 MinimumFreq 35 MaximumFreq 36 AccelTime1 37 DecelTime1 49 l0PointConfiguration When using the AOP this parameter is configured during module definition on the General page IMPORTANT AIl1 0 points are configured as inputs by default Identify which points are outputs when needed for proper operation using parameter 49 lOPointConfiguration Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 99 Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E 291E Units 1 PhaseL1Current 2 PhaseL2Current 3 PhaseL3Current 4 AverageCurrent 5 ThermalUtilized 6 StarterStatus 7 StarterCommand 8 AuxlOStatus 9 NetworkStatus 10 DLXControlStatus 11 OutputSourceV 12 SensorSourceV 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 100 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Parameter Groups Bulletin 294E Units Basic Stat
78. 94E Controllers b Combined Load Conductors c Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A For Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers which use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor the input current like the output current is just the current to the motor Therefore the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output conductors is 125 percent of the motor full load current rating as specified in the text of 12 5 3 a Referring to Figure 62 the full load current rating of a three phase 460 V 5 Hp induction motor is 7 6 amperes Using this value both the input and output conductors must have an ampacity that is not less than 125 of 7 6 A or 9 5 A The Bulletin 294E controllers use a variable frequency AC drive to control the motor These drives use a power conversion method that generates input currents that are larger than the output currents The input currents are larger because unlike the output currents to the motor they are not sinusoidal Consequently when determining the minimum ampacity of the input conductors the requirement of 12 5 3 must be based on the rated input current of the controller rather than the full load current rating of the motor Therefore the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125 of the controller rated input current while that of the output conductors must be 125 of the motor full load cur
79. 94E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 47 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 48 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 49 Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 115 Chapter 4 116 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bit Function 5 4 3 2 1 Pt00 X Pt01 X Pt02 X Pt03 X Pt04 X Pt05 FilterOffOn Parameter Number 50 i F Access Rule GET SET This parameter determines the input which must be present for this time Data Type USINT before being reported ON Group User 1 0 Config Units msecs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 0 FilterOnOff Parameter Number 51 i p Access Rule GET SET This parameter deter
80. Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 143 Chapter 4 144 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Input03Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 3 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input04Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 4 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input05Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 5 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 63 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User
81. Action amp DNidle Value Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 209 AppendixB CIP Information The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of Bound DOP Instances Figure 65 State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E Protection Fault Network Fault Override Unrecoverable Network Fault Return Object State Yes Conflict Yes Ignore lt gt Message Comm Override Yes Yes vay Turn off output Use DNFault Action amp DNFault Value Logic Enabled Perform LEO Function Apply Force Value Apply Value Available Clear Value Use DNidle Action amp DNidle Value 210 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Analog Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000A Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Input Point Object 1 Get Revision UINT 2 2 Get Max Instance UINT 1 One instance of the Analog Input Point Object will supported CommandFreq from Assembly 154 is placed in the value attribute when it is consumed Value 0 Default The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Input Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Analog Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000B Implemented in Bulleti
82. ArmorStart LT must be derated and applied The majority of recommendations regarding drive cable address issues are caused by the nature of the drive output A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern These pulses affect the wire insulation and can be a source of electrical noise The rise time amplitude and frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire cable type The choice of cable must consider 1 The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed 2 The need for the cable to contain noise caused by the drive output 3 The amount of cable charging current available from the drive 4 Possible voltage drop and subsequent loss of torque for long wire runs Keep the motor cable lengths less than 45 ft from the ArmorStart LT Unshielded Cable Properly designed multi conductor cable can provide superior performance in wet applications significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation and reduce cross coupling between drives The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other devices such as communications cards photoelectric switches weigh scales and others Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific EMC standards for CE C Tick or FCC Cable specifications depend on the installation type
83. Class USINT 10 F starter Protect E User 1 0 Config 108 Ol Reset Level USINT 75 F misc config Parameter editable P Starter Display F Starter Setup Edit Cance Gi Diagnostics Gi Administrative Settings ens File Seconds between refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved In the figure above the Starter Setup parameters are viewed To modify a parameter the user will click the Edit button Figure 51 Enter Network Password xl y This secure Web Site at 192 168 1 11 requires you to log on Please type the User Name and Password that you use for ArmorStart 281E 0 5 2 54 24VDC UserName Administrator Password I Save this password in your password list The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name Administrator The factory default password is blank The user is expected to change the Password to avoid unauthorized access E mail Notification Configuration ArmorStart LT internal web server will support the e mailing of warning and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP The configuration parameters for the SMTP Server s IP address user login and port number are configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server The user will configure the device name device description and device trip type Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN
84. D If no fault Motor On OFF Motor Off Motor Off Motor Off PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Motor Off Motor Off With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 0 Momentary pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch Current Mode Key Press OFF HAND JOG AUTO NO KEY PRESSED Motor Off Motor Off FWD REV FWD LED Set REV LED FWD LED Set REV LED REV LED Set FWD LED REV LED Set FWD LED JOG If no fault Jog Motor AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAND If no fault Motor On OFF Motor Off Motor Off Motor Off PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Motor Off Motor Off IMPORTANT If multiple buttons are pressed at the same time the software interprets this as a no button pressed condition The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them is the OFF button If the OFF button is pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons the processor will behave as if the OFF button were pressed by itself Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 37 Chapter1 Product Overview Source Brake Contactor and Connector Bulletin 294E only 38 Keypad Disable Parameter Keypad Disable parameter 67 only inhibits the HAND FWD REV and JOG buttons on the HOA keypad The OFF and AUTO buttons are always enabled even if parameter 67 is s
85. DC ArmorStart LT Reverser 1 1A 7 6A 24V DC ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 0 SHP ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 2HP v gt By Category By Vendor Favorites Cox core _ Cee Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 245 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 9 Inthe New Module window enter the Name of the Armorstart LT and the IP address assigned to it You can now start to configure the ArmorStart LT Begin with Motor Protection amp Control Mi New Module Geneva Connacton 234E FD2PSZ ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 1HP Module info Allen Bradley Motor Protection amp Contiot EN2TR_32 Speed Control User 1 0 Armorstart_LT_36 1921681 35 Fault Configuration Status Faulk Status Intesnet Protocol Port Configuration Network 10 Atthe Motor Protection amp Control enter the motor information Note Please refer to the motor nameplate for the information Soe Connection Module Info Motor Protection amp Consol soror Nemapletn Speed Control 4 User 1 0 ag o VAC Fak Configuration b Status SE o B Fauk Status Intemet Protocol Ful Load Current 25 Amps Port Configuration Network Motor Protection Advanced Overload Current 25 gt Ames Current Limi 37 gt Amps Stop Mode Ramp Toso v 246 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 11 Next select Speed Control By default Speed Reference is se
86. Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units FLA Minimum Value 50 Maximum Value 600 Default Value 150 Parameter Number 74 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units secs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 250 Default Value 10 Parameter Number 75 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units FLA Minimum Value 100 Maximum Value 600 Default Value 600 Parameter Number 76 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units secs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 250 Default Value 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 ULTripDelay This parameter determines the time below Underload Level before the unit will trip ULTripLevel This parameter determines the Underload Trip Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps ULWarningLevel This parameter determines the Underload Warning Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 77 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units X X SECS Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 25 0 Default Value 5 0 Parameter Number 78 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units FLA Minimum Value 10 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 50 Parameter Number 79 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units FLA Minimum Value 10 Maximum Value 100 Defa
87. Decima DEMO_REV Pt04Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt04Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt05Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt05Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt0ODeviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt00Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt01Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt01Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt02Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt02Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt03Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt03Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt04Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt04Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt0SDeviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt05Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt06Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt06Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt07Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt07Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt08Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt08Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt09Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt09Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt10Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt10Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt11Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt11Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt12Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt12Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt13Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt13Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt14Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt14Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt15Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Pt15Deviceln BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Int00Deviceln DEMO_REV 0 Int00Deviceln INT Decima 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Table 18 Bulletin 290E 291E Starters Starter Stat Produced Assembly Instance 152 Starter Stat Produced Assembly for Bulletin 2
88. DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt08DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt09DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt09DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt10DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt10DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt11DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt1 1DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt12DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt12DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt13DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt13DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt14DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt14DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt15DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt15DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Int00DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Int0O0DeviceOut INT Decimal ASLT_DEMO OutputCurrent ASLT_DEMO I 0utputCurrent INT Decimal ASLT_DEMO OutputVoltage ASLT_DEMO 1 0utputVoltage INT Decimal 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style ASLT_DEMO DCBusVoltage ASLT_DEMO I DCBusVoltage Decima ASLT_DEMO SwitchedVoltageLevel ASLT_DEMO 1 SwitchedVoltageLevel Decima ASLT_DEMO UnswitchedVoltageLevel ASLT_DEMO 1 UnswitchedVoltageLevel Decima ASLT_DEMO InternalFanRPM ASLT_DEMO I InternalFanRPM INT Decima ASLT_DEMO OperatingHours ASLT_DEMO 0peratingHours Decima ASLT_DEMO DriveTemperature ASLT_DEMO DriveTemperature Decima ASLT_DEMO TripStatus ASLT_DEMO 1 TripStatus Binary ASLT_DEMO Warnin
89. E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters RunNetFitValue This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault State the starter will go to on a NetFit if Parameter 45 RunNetFitAction 1 GotoFault Value 0 OFF 1 0N RunNetidlAction This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 48 RunNetIdlValue defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 48 0 GoToldleValue 1 HoldLastState RunNetldlValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 47 RunNetldlAction is set to 1 0 0FF 1 0N User 1 0 Configuration Group 10PointConfigure This parameter determines the point that is configured 0 Input 1 Output Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 47 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 48 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F Default Value 0 Parameter Number 49 Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation P
90. E e 80 Connections eaaa oE A dd ewes A S 81 Config red By saci poneiaterouna masa necator ka sat auoaet 81 HOA Keypad Op ion ncce avid dos ssa a citeiee aosety pe aries 82 Source Brake Electro Mehanical Brake Option 5 82 User Configurable I O ccs eutesneraum nas wotedgh etueeewly raved 82 RSLogix 5000 Add On Profile sic ice cia Nd tee eee ewes 83 Auto Generated As Nacbd aces secure sit teuns dy ata ad arncaetta gettin Scone 85 Chapter 4 Electronic Data Sheet EDS cyiev ta sacs das hanGhan tence aeese ee 99 Basic Set p Parameters yagi ss Sawing eise cesta a i a iaraa 99 Parameter Groups i cia iwi irene a n o a ba 100 ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP Pararieterssc fice 2ecas ees waves 102 LRPOC ME HOI AS aii Sy evo sito te dns 2S oe ee tala a a i 102 Parameter Programming wrandeecateanies Yuwie vax titeatendneans 102 Bulletin 2908 29 VE oie cle a aE E aud eh ewe A e 102 Basic Stats Groups sea lta tear esas eae Ri eer aA 102 Tip Status CROUD tas irena otra tte dala Se A nE E aalas 107 Basic Configuration Group iiss necro s La cueees es ee beers 111 Starter Protection Grou pwcdei ttacowsea bab desi Ss Os wks ae tens 112 User I O Configuration Group 0 cece eee eee eee a ee 115 Miscellaneous Configuration Group 0s eee ee ee eee 119 Advanced Configuration s sesersreresrrrererrererrere 121 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 13 Table of Contents Diagnostics Specificatio
91. E terminals Maximum Rated Operating Voltage 400Y 230 480Y 277 15 10 Rated Impulsed Voltage Um 4kV Dielectric Withstand UL 1960V AC IEC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Cat No Hp kW Overload Range Maximum Rated Operating n 2 1 5 0 24 3 5 A Current Te tare 5 3 1 1 7 6A Overload Type Solid state IT i 10 15 20 with thermal memory retention Trip Class see Motor Overload Trip Curves Trip Rating Full Load Current FLC 120 of FLC Reset Mode Automatic or manual Overload Reset Level 1 100 TCU Overvoltage Category Ill Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 165 Chapter6 Specifications Electrical Ratings Power Supply NEC Class 2 Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC 410 20 Overvoltage Protection Reverse polarity protected Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 150 mA Power 3 6W a e Input Current each 50mA Maximum Current 450 mA Maximum Power 14 4W Peak Inrush lt 5 A for 35 ms Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 125 mA Control Circuit External Saure Switched Power Supply Out sa Requirements put Current each 500 mA Maximum Current 1 625 A Maximum Power 42W Peak Inrush lt 5 A for 35 ms Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 275 mA Power 6 6W Switched and Unswitched Nu
92. EEE E tes E E E E E EE eK es 18 Feature Description ers ieccririiieit ttit EESE EEEE s 19 Standard Features Across Product Familly 000 19 Network Options tyij 27 dae Ge ees ies 20 Factory Installed pronss co0 eteceastanadeane gst temuaeetamane 22 ArmorStart LT Characteristics Bulletin 290E 291E 4 23 Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin 290E 291E 046 24 ArmorStart LT Characteristics Bulletin 294E 00 000s 25 Catalog Number Explanation Bulletin 294E 0 00000 26 Basic Operation sareei ei eh ae plats Aah E ae tats Moe cua 27 Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets 27 Control Circuit casiniepoxoteae acaeno av eto monies aeaedmae 27 Motor Circuite aeran tere 2 betel a s E ee A a aaa 29 oa O a a E TEE 29 Overload Protection as Sse hasitag death 2 aeovarar bens tteens a atasata Seg cided render sta 30 Mode of Operation Bulletin 290E 291E 2 0 cece cece ee eee ee ee 30 F llVoltage SERIE wit ore noe oeha ene wn A EEA 30 Mode of Operation Bulletin 294E 29 ach sete ow eaeecdsdyegs pettiness 31 Sensorless Vector Performance 0 0 cece cence cece eeeeees 31 Status LEDs and Reset tic siete Rode COL tas Det bie oul 32 Electronic Data Sheer EDS vcnscbisansdn te ek See aes 33 Pa ELA CTOSEL CS ais Ae arhigctn ain usestie eek cya Ron ae cae ae eRe a era 34 Protection Faults f cciacecese a espints iu daewoo ae epemekenaiau 34 Optional HOA Select
93. EN P June 2012 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 Figure 59 UL508C Variable Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation Short Circuit Test Circuit Short Circuit Test Circuit UL 508C Manufacturer s choice test with6 4 r Reduce rating fortest ampere max to45A Maximum i i i 1 7 I I conductor size I I I I I i sees Z l r J MG VHP Motor Max 400 Rated Output Current Max rating for 10 AWG 1D buletin294 i Controller 400 15A 6A 250A i f 2HP Motor l f i l Controller H l Max permitted rating f Suitable for I Max permitted _ fortestfusebased y motor group rating fortest 1 T onmaximumsize 4 instalation l aed Jf fuse based on of power conductors f RatedOuput Curent 1 5A Rated Output I Current 1 5A I l l 6A fuse max Current 45Afusemax q a i ews TNS Maximum conductor size 10 AWG Motor Motor d cA This section uses Figure 60 to explain the requirements from 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 that are relevant to and permit the multiple motor branch circuit of Figure 58 The following is the complete text of 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 and an abbreviated version of Table 30 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79 The table is abbreviated to cover
94. EtherNet IP version e Asasequence of LED flashes on the ECM LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E 291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits 1 0 OverloadTrip OverloadTrip 2 1 PhaseLossTrip PhaseLShortTrip 3 2 UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip 4 3 SensorShortTrip SensorShortTrip 5 4 PhaselmbalTrip OverCurrentTrip 6 5 NonVolMemoryTrip NonVolMemoryTrip 7 6 reserved ParamSyncTrip 8 7 Jamtrip DCBusOrOpenDiscnnct 9 8 StallTrip StallTrip 10 9 UnderloadTrip Overlemperature 11 10 reserved GroundFault 12 11 reserved RestartRetries 13 12 reserved DriveHdwFault Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Diagnostics Chapter 5 LED Flash BitEnumeration Bulletin 290E 291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits 14 13 OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip 15 14 UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip 16 15 HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip Can not be disabled A ProtectFltEnable parameter param 42 is used to enable and disable individual protection faults This parameter will be a bit enumerated parameter with each disable fault bit enumerated Not all Faults can be disabled Setting a bit to the value 1 enables the corresponding protection fault Clearing a bit disables the protection fault For protection faults that can not be disabled the value is always 1 There are two Prote
95. Fault 39 40 Unknown Fault The table below lists Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for Drive units Table 34 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units PF4M Fault Fault Code Fault Text Help Text Code 1 Fault 1 2 User Defined User defined trip has occurred 3 Motor Overload The load has drawn excessive current 7 4 Drive Overload 150 load for 1 min or 200 load for 3 sec exceeded 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Table 34 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units PF4M Fault Fault Code Fault Text Help Text Code 5 Phase U to Gnd A Phase U to Ground fault detected between drive and motor 38 6 Phase V to Gnd A Phase V to Ground fault detected between drive and motor 39 7 Phase W to Gnd A Phase W to Ground fault detected between drive and motor 40 8 Phase UV Short Excessive current detected between phases U and V 41 9 Phase UW Short Excessive current detected between phases U and W 42 10 Phase VW Short Excessive current detected between phases V and W 43 11 Ground Fault A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals 13 12 Stall Trip The drive is unable to accelerate the motor 6 13 Switched Power Indicates the loss of switched control power Not available in u
96. FthemetlP Speed Control race P e Private Network 192168 1 User 1 0 Fault Configuration Description a IP Address Status y Fault Status Host Name Intenet Protocol Modde Defntion Port Configuration 2 Series Network Revision ist Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Configured By RSLogix 5000 Ethemet Address Status Creating 5 In the General page enter the ArmorStart LT IP address The Private Address corresponds to the local IP address configurations using the switches The IP Address is a static address but configured from the webpage This allows more flexibility in defining the address If the address is served up use Host Name field 6 In the General page select the Change button From here define what options are available and what discrete point if any will need to be defined as an output The General page of the ArmorStart LT AOP differs from many other product AOPs The Module definition allows the user to specify the following items e Electronic Keying Module Compatibility e Configured By RSLogix 5000 or ArmorStart LT Embedded Web Page e Connection Type Data or Listen Only Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 79 Chapter3 Product Commissioning e User I O Configuration Specify the Input or Output use for each I O point e Keypad Option Is product supplied with this option e El
97. I O points may be used as either an input or an output The ArmorStart LT hardware does not require the user to specify a point s actual use as an input or output but the AOP requires the user to specify it to assign the correct tag name for the I O point When a point is configured as an input or output the corresponding tag name is PtO_ Data If a point is configured as an output the corresponding feedback tag name is PtO_ReadBack Using the navigation tree on the left start configuring the ArmorStart LT with the simplified wizard The minimum configuration is displayed on each page Review each field to determine if the default setting is acceptable or modify as appropriate for your application Note that more advanced properties are available using the Advance buttons on the screen 2 Module Properties EthernetIP 294E FD4P2Z 11 ee General Motor Protection amp Control Connection Motor Nameplate Motor Protection amp Control Speed Control Volts s User 1 0 s leaded Fault Configuration oe o Ee 3 Status Fault Status yee a2 A Internet Protocol peat A Ampe Port Configuration V Network Motor Protection Advanced Overload Current 3 6 Amps Current Limit 6 3 Amps Motor Control Advanced Stop Mode Te Starting amp p Ramp To Stop Stopping Status Offline mk Cancel Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissionin
98. Instance 3 is the required output consumed assembly Instance 3 ODVA Cmd Byte Bit 0 Run Forward Instance 52 Instance 52 is the required input produced assembly Instance 52 ODVA Status Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 197 AppendixB CIP Information Instance 100 Instance 100 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E and 291E units Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance 0 0 Reserved for Logix N A 1 2 AssemblyRevision N A 2 4 FLASetting 28 3 6 OLResetLevel 29 4 8 OverloadClass 30 5 10 ProtFltResetMode 4 6 12 ProtectFltEnable 42 7 14 WarningEnable 43 8 16 RunNetFltAction 45 9 18 RunNetFitValue 46 10 20 RunNetldleAction 47 11 22 RunNetldleValue 48 12 24 10PointConfigure 49 13 26 FilterOffOn 50 14 28 FilterOnOff 51 15 30 OutProtFltState 52 16 32 OutProtFitValue 53 17 34 OutNetFltState 54 18 36 OutNetFltValue 55 19 38 OutNetldleState 56 20 40 OutNetldleValue 57 21 42 Input00Function 58 22 44 Input01Function 59 23 46 Input02Function 60 24 48 Input03Function 61 25 50 Input04Function 62 26 52 Input05Function 63 27 54 NetworkOverride 64 28 56 CommOverride 65 29 58 KeypadMode 66 30 60 KeypadDisable 67 31 62 OLWarningLevel 69 32 64 JamInhibitTime 70 33 66 JamTripDeley 71 34 68 JamTripLevel 72 35 70 JamWarni
99. LED The bicolor green red LED combines the functions of the Run and Fault LEDs Solid green is illuminated when a Run command is present The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a protection fault trip condition is present See table for fault blink patterns NS Network Status LED The bicolor green red LED indicates the status of the CIP network connection See Network Status Indicator for further information Flashing bicolor red green indicates a self test on power up Flashing green indicates an IP address is configured no CIP connections are established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Steady green indicates at least one CIP connection is established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Flashing red indicates the connection has timed out Steady Red indicates a duplicate IP Address detected LS1 and LS2 Link Status LEDs The bicolor green yellow LED shows the activity link status of each EtherNet IP port Solid green is illuminated when a link has been established at 100 Mbps Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has been established at 10 Mbps 157 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Indicator MS Module Status LED Table 25 ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators Description The bicolor green red LED indicates the status of the mod
100. LT_DEMO Pt09Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt09Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt10Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt10Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt11Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt11Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt12Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt12Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt13Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt13Deviceln BOOL Decimal 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style ASLT_DEMO Pt14Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt14Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt15Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt15Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Int0ODeviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Int00Deviceln BOOL Decimal Table 12 Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 294E Instance 156 Drive Status Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved name I ConnectionFault 1 Reserved name I ConnectionFault 2 Reserved name I ConnectionFault 3 Reserved name I ConnectionFault 4 AtReference NetRefStatus NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 BrakeStatus DisconnectClosed KeyPadJogging KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled 6 OutputFrequency Low xxx x Hz 7 OutputFrequency High xxx x Hz 8 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00 9 10 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05Devi
101. Motor0LRetention 72 InternalFreq 73 SkipFrequency 74 SkipFreqBand 75 DCBrakeTime 76 DCBrakeLevel 77 ReverseDisable 78 FlyingStartEna 79 Compensation 80 SlipHertzAtFLA 81 BusRegulateMode 82 MotorOLSelect 83 SWCurrentTrip 84 AutoRestartTries 85 AutoRestartDelay 86 BoostSelect 87 MaximumVoltage 88 MotorNamPlateFLA 89 BrakeMode 90 BrakeFreqrhresh 91 BrakeCurrThresh Starter Protection 41 ProtFltResetMode 42 ProtectFltEnable 43 WarningEnable 44 ProtectFitReset 45 RunNetFitAction 46 RunNetFaultValue 47 RunNetldleAction 48 RunNetldleValue Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Common to Bulletin 290E 291E and Bulletin 294E Units User 1 0 Config 49 l0PointConfigure 50 FilterOffOn 51 FilterOnOff 52 OutProtFitState 53 OutProtFitValue 54 OutNetFaultState 55 OutNetFaultValue 56 OutNetldleState 57 OutNetldleValue 58 Input00Function 59 Input01 Function 60 Input02Function 61 Input03Function 62 Input04Function 63 Input05Function Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Miscellaneous Config 64 NetworkOverride 65 CommsOverride 66 KeypadMode 67 KeypadDisable 68 SetToDefaults 101 Chapter4 Bulletin 290 291E 294E Programmable Parameters ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP Introduction Parameters This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function Parameter Programming Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common se
102. Network RSNetWon Type 1756 EN2TR 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethemet Bridge 2 Port Twisted Pai Media Vendor Allen Bradiey Parent Local Ethemet Address Name EN2TR_32 Private Network Description O IP Address O Host Name Ce Module Definition Revision 31 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection None Time Syne Connection None 244 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 7 Right click on the EN2TR 32 in the Controller Organizer at the I O Configuration gt 1756 Backplane gt 1756 EN2TR select New Module Controller Organizer J Controller Armorstart_LT_Test EI Tasks Motion Groups EI Add On Instructions Data Types E Trends 5 6 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L63 4rmorstart_LT_Test a 0 1 1756 EN2TR EN2TR_3 Ha Ethernet P New Module Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Delete Del Cross Reference Ctri E Properties Alt Enter Print 8 In the Select Module window select Other and choose the 294E FD2P5Z and click on OK Note Please select the appropriate module If the wrong module is selected once RSLOGIX 5000 is in Online with the controller a yellow triangle will appear next to the module indicating an I O error has occurred E Select Module ArmorStart LT DOL 0 24A 3 5A 24 DC ArmorStart LT DOL 1 1A 7 6A 24V DC ArmorStart LT Reverser 0 244 3 5A 24V
103. Provides details about how to configure your module EtherNet IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide Publication ENET AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies EtherNet IP Industrial Protocol White Paper Publication ENET WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCP UDP IP based Ethernet network Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1770 4 1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Wiring and Grounding Guidelines PWM AC Drives Publication DRIVES IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives Product Certifications website http www rockwellautomation com products certification Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Table 2 ODVA Resources Resource http www odva org Description Open DeviceNet Vendors Association ODVA website http www odva org default aspx tabid 54 The CIP Advantage website CIP features and benefits e How to get started Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication http www odva org Portals 0 Library Publications_Numbered PUBOO148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manual
104. REV Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt07DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt08DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV PtO9DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt09DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt10DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt11DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt12DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt13DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt14DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt15DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt15DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Int0ODeviceOut DEMO_REV I Int00DeviceOut Decimal DEMO_REV L1Current DEMO_REV 1 L1Current Decima DEMO_REV L2Current DEMO_REV 1 L2Current Decima DEMO_REV L3Current DEMO_REV 1 L3Current Decima DEMO_REV AvgCurrent DEMO_REV I AvgCurrent T Decima DEMO_REV PercentTCU DEMO_REV I PercentTCU Decima DEMO_REV SwitchedVoltageLevel DEMO_REV I SwitchedVoltageLevel INT Decima DEMO_REV UnswitchedVoltageLevel DEMO_REV UnswitchedVoltageLevel N Decima DEMO_REV TripStatus DEMO_REV TripStatus N Binary DEMO_REV WarningStatus DEMO_REV I WarningStatus IN Binary Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 The following table provides a brief explanation for the tag function Table 20 Bulletin 290E 291E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation Device Output Command Tags
105. S LATCH input f Output D Reset 14 From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Output button and select RunForward from the pull down menu RunForward is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor Click OK 15 Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the RSL function block 16 Connect the output of the RSL function block to Run Fwd File Edit View Climunications Tools Help a siele Col AA F 8028 mm mo ae ann wren wel PV 2 e e llo a E 17 Click on the Verify button located in the toolbar or select Logic Verify from the Tools pull down menu 18 Click on the Edit button to toggle out of edit mode if online with a device 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 19 Go to the pull down menu in the right corner of the toolbar and select Download Note Ensure that the PLC key switch is in the Program position If in any other position the download will not occur and an error will be generated 20 Press OK when told the download was successful 21 Now from the same pull down menu select Logic Enable On 22 The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active Table 36 DeviceLogix Input and Output Variables Bulletin 290E Element Type Bullet
106. SMTP Server Address String The default value of this String is the null string Addr Length UDINT Length of string in bytes Addr Data Array of ASCII characters USINT 6 Required Set NV SMTP User Name Structof SMTP User Name String The default value of this string is the null string To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes To Data Array of ASCII characters USINT 7 Required Set NV SMTP Password Struct of SMTP Password String The default value of this String is the null string To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes To Data Array of ASCII characters USINT 8 Required Set NV SMTP Port UINT The SMTP Port The Default Value is 0 9 Optional Set NV Trip Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails for individual trip conditions 10 Optional Set v Warning Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails for individual warning conditions 11 Optional Set NV Trip Reset Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails when trip conditions are cleared 12 Optional Set NV Warning Reset Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails when warning conditions are cleared 13 Optional Get V Trip Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0 response to a trip condition 14 Optional Get V Trip Cleared Emails UINT umber of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0 response to clearing a trip 15 Optional Get V Warning Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0 response to a warningcondition 16 Optional Get V Warning Cleared Emails UINT umber of emails sent
107. Sense Errors Frame Too Long MAC Receive Errors 6 Get Set Interface Control Struct of Control Bits Forced Interface Speed 7 Get Interface Type USINT 8 Get Inteface State USINT 9 Get Set Admin State USINT 10 Get Interface Label SHORT_STRING Instance 1 LS 1 Instance 2 LS 2 The following common services will be implemented for the Ethernet Link Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 225 Appendix B CIP Information Trip and Warning Email Object CLASS CODE 0x0376 No class attributes will be supported Attribute Need in Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ID Implementation Rule 2 Required Set NV To Struct of Email address of the recipient The default value of this of Trip and Warning Emails String is the null string To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes To Data Array of ASCII characters Example USINT userl ra rockwell com 3 Required Set NV From Struct of Email address of this device The default value of this String is the null string From Length UDINT Length of string in bytes From Data Array of ASCII characters Example USINT user1 ra rockwell com 5 Required Set NV SMTP Server Address Struct of
108. Set Open Format Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to bad format 3 Set Open Resource Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to lack of resources 4 Set Open Other Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests rejected for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources 5 Set Close Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests received 6 Set Close Format Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected due to bad format Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 203 Appendix B CIP Information 204 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 7 Set Close Other Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected for reasons other than bad format 8 Set Connection Timeouts UINT Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred 9 Get Connection Entry Lists Struct of NumConnEntries UINT Number of connection entries This attribute divided by 8 and rounded up for any remainder gives the length of the array in bytes of the ConnOpenBits field of this structure ConnOpenBits Array of BOOL List of connections Each bit represents a possible connection 11 Get CPU_ Utilization UINT CPU Utilization in tenths of a percent 12 Get MaxBuffSize UDINT Amount of buffer space in bytes originally available 13 Get BufSize Remaining UDINT Amount of buf
109. T_DEMO NetworkReferenceStatus ASLT_DEMO I NetworkReferenceStatus BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO AtReference ASLT_DEMO I AtReference BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO DeviceLogixEnabled ASLT_DEMO DeviceLogixEnabled BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO KeypadAuto ASLT_DEMO KeypadAuto BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO KeypadOff ASLT_DEMO KeypadOff BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO KeypadHand ASLT_DEMO 1 KeypadHand BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO KeypadJogging ASLT_DEMO 1 KeypadJogging BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO DisconnectClosed ASLT_DEMO 1 DisconnectClosed BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO BrakeContactorStatus ASLT_DEMO 1 BrakeContactorStatus BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO OutputFrequency ASLT_DEMO I 0utputFrequency INT Decima ASLT_DEMO PtooData ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt00Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt01Data ASLT_DEMO I Pt01Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt02Data ASLT_DEMO I Pt02Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt03Data ASLT_DEMO I Pt03Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO I Pt04Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt05Data ASLT_DEMO I Pt05Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt0ODeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt00DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt01DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt01DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt02DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt02DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt03DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt03DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt04DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt04DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt0SDeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt05DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt06DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt06DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt07DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt07DeviceOut BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt08
110. Table 24 for details Table 24 Boost Select Options Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 85 Related Parameter 84 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units X X SECS Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 120 0 Default Value 1 0 Parameter Number 86 Related Parameters 28 29 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 14 Default Value 8 Options Description Custom V Hz l 30 0 VT n ote 40 0 VT 45 0 VT 3 0 0 no IR 6 0 0 4 25 CT 8 5 0 CT default 4 75 7 10 10 0 CT Constant Torque 1 125 7 i 15 0 C1 3 175 0 20 0 CT Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 153 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Figure 56 Boost Select 100 1 2 Motor NP Volts S 50 2 v g Settings 5 14 2 gt P29 Motor NP Hertz MaximumVoltage Parameter Number 87 Related P t Sets the highest voltage the drive will output A Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units VAC Minimum Value 20V AC Maximum Value 460V AC Default Value 2V AC MotorNamePlateFLA Parameter Number 88 Related P t Set to the motor nameplate Full Load Amps eee Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Amps Minimum V
111. Tag Description Use RunForward Command VFD forward RunReverse Command VFD reverse ResetFault Fault reset Pt0OData If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt01Data If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt02Data If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt03Data If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt04Data If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt05Data If user defined as output commnd output ON Pt00Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt01Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt02Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt03Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt04Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt05Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt06Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt07Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt08Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine PtO9Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt10Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt11Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt12Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt13Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt14Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt15Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Int0ODeviceln Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 95 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Table 21 Bulletin 290E 291E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation 96
112. This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition 3 Both SlipHertzAtFLA Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current BusRegulateMode Controls the operation of the drive voltage regulation which is normally operational at deceleration or when the bus voltage rises 0 Disable 1 Enabled Parameter Number 79 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 80 Related Parameters 30 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 10 0 Hz Default Value 2 0 Hz Parameter Number 81 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 ATTENTION The bus regulator mode function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads However it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur 1 Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input volta
113. User Manual Allen Bradley ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Catalog Numbers 290E 291E 294E EtherNety IP Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variet
114. a Table 430 250 of NFPA 70 2011 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A 1 Requirement One Controller Ratings The motor controllers and overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Text 7 2 10 4 1 Each motor controller and overload device is listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection Analysis To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple motor branch circuit shown in Figure 61 7 2 10 4 1 must be satisfied each controller must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch circuit protection The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller confirms that it including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses satisfying 7 2 10 4 1 The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment The Bulletin 294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment Referring to Figure 62 a indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy 7 2 10 4 1 The marking Suitable for Motor Group Installation satisfies the requirement to be listed for group ins
115. able The Electronic Control Module ECM a gland plate for wire entry and the aluminum alloy enclosure which makes up the back cover top housing and wiring access door The ECM includes communications discrete I O status and diagnostic LEDs and the node address switches All mating surfaces are sealed using foam in place gasket or o ring Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 16 Dimensions for Bulletin 290E 291E 260 730___ 10 2 166 5 a 6 6 r ee 217 83 202 05 pameceet ae ee j 020 eee 152 65 il 6 0 Right Side View Q o F q 6 y 74 6 6 1 3 Ou 5713 K 57 13 OG O 2 3 2 3 p a IH i H l m 38 49 38 49 1n conaiit opening 5y pad se 24 25 485 24 257 0 75 in conduit opening 1 0 1 j R Conduit Gland Entrance ArmorConnect Media Gland Entrance optional Line i ine NG pias Motor ff 37
116. addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers fuses and conductors must satisfy The letters in the circles on Figure 61 and Figure 62 are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses Ellipses points are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple motor branch circuit shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62 Unless indicated all text is from NFPA 79 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 185 Appendix A 186 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Figure 61 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Conductor and Controller Protection Electrical Supply 480Y 277V Available Fault Current rre eseenoen Sym Amps RMS 9 KA Disconnecting H Means 1 Fuses D H Te Dae i protection denice Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG Controller ratings further restrict the fuse Suitable for Motor Group Installation Max Ratings i Sym Amps RMS SM WOK i Fuse ASA 45AY sf 14 AWG Ye HP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP TEIMME Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 ad Compareto Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate controller max fuse ratin
117. ager UCMN Yes 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Communication Ratings EtherNet IP ODVA Conformance Testing Specifications Chapter 6 EtherNet IP Interoperability Performance Per A9 PF 2 1 Ethernet Communication Rate 10 100 Mbps half or full duplex Ethernet Ports 2 embedded switch Ethernet Network Topologies Supported Star Tree Linear and Ring Device Level Ring Support Beacon Performance IEEE 1583 Transparent Clock Ethernet Connector M12 D code female with Ethernet keying 4 Pin Ethernet Cable Category 5e Shielded or unshielded IP Configuration Static DHCP or BootP EtherNet IP DHCP Timeout 30s Data Transported over both TCP and UDP ashes ate pps Seopa nd UNE Consume Instance Command Default of 4 words Instance 154 Produce Instance Status Default of 16 words Instance 156 Message Support Unicast or Multicast Address Conflict Detection ACD IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet IP devices Sockets 150 maximum Security Login and password configurable E mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Web Server Webpage Features Status diagnostics configuration Concurrent Sessions 20 Web Server HTTP 1 1 Concurrent TCP Connections Maximum of 5 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections Exclusive owner data or Maximum 1 0 Connecti
118. aiesa5 aes dA 4 eae eee aad 196 TO Asset Dies iaie nr mass EE EOE EA 197 Connection Manager Objectsc 00022 2 a4 04 vuan eeeae ade Sena hale 203 CLASS CODE 00006 hara a a R E E EEE aeons 203 Class IC On Hee RIOTS xh sierate eia aana aut ate Shee ia 204 Class 3 Connections 040 v4 eed Pe ee eee es 205 Discrete Input Point Object aiid earn ted eee AAA ae ewan ayaares 206 CLASS CODE 00008 isesi sete kanan i i e ose eee 206 Discrete Output Point Object ins css ese sasace Sankn bor sads wardens 206 CLASS CODE 050000 eatin cee eu ULC Os a del oie eld 206 Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements 207 Analog Input Point Occ tescdewrs den scwrn nets haaenes etetannnes 211 CLASS CODE Ox000A jets sven ni deve ee keer ie es 211 Analog Output Point Object s3dsgsncadiehuen ase bruen gman aens 211 CLASS CODE 0x000B ises 9455 caetn cath cnG als doo TERRE 211 Parameter Object toy acini te ekiabscs n EE vile wen ees coon pies 212 CLASS CODE Ox0G0P iaituid es th tout oa Seis E dens 212 Parameter Group Object s ssrsrsererrreresrrrererrerrerere 213 GEASS GOD O00 0 tu Renn tnae oui a E a a 213 Discrete Input Group Objectx cc24 552 cu othe ey idee ose le lous 214 CRASS CODE OOOI Day setae eit eee teste 214 Discrete Output Group Objects 22255 vance Redeeninees de Spawn sete 214 CLASS CODE Ox001E 6 2 55 Siadas hl wena eo Opes baaeeS 214 Control Supervisor Objech adic ecwenirdvedaeae ins cawesen ves 215 CLASS GODE 0x00 29 cis
119. al machinery according to 7 2 10 4 of NFPA 79 The controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable for installation in multiple motor branch circuits according to 430 53 C and 430 53 D of NFPA 70 NEC The controllers that have the Power Media Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers installation only on industrial machinery Multiple motor branch circuits like that shown in Figure 58 have this fundamental tradeoff protecting more than one controller with a single set of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of fuses in front of each controller the construction of each controller itself must be more robust For the circuit configuration shown in Figure 58 to be practical the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all of the motors without opening under normal starting and running conditions This rating of fuse must be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single motor and its controller In general as the rating of the fuse increases so does the magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens This higher magnitude of fault current res
120. alue 0 0 For 0 5 Hp units Min 0 Max 3 0 Default 1 5 F For 1 0 Hp units Min 0 Max 5 0 Default 2 5 Maximum Value Hp Dependent For 2 0Hp units Min 0 Max 8 4 Default 3 6 Default Value Hp Dependent 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 BrakeMode This parameter determines the source brake control mode 0 NoBrakeControl 1 AboveFrequency 2 AboveCurrent BrakeFreqThresh This parameter determines the frequency above which the source brake is released BrakeCurrThresh This parameter determines the motor current above which the source brake is released Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 89 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 90 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 91 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 8 0 Default Value 0 0 IMPORTANT For parameter 90 and 91 the value of the threshold can be set beyond the operational maximum limit of the product or at a level which may cause multiple trans
121. and Settings tiggs Desktop Booty Server Isy Ioj xj File Tools Help r Request History Clear History Add to Relation List hrmin sec Type Cthemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 12 47 24 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 10 88 70 2 12 47 24 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 m Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOOTP DHCP Ethernet Address MAC 20 14 Save the Relation List You can save the Relation List to use later To save the Relation List perform the following steps 1 Select Save As from the File menu Figure 45 Save Relation List fq BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 C Documents and Settings tiggs Desktop Booty Senven contrans lol x Fie Tools Help New Open Add ta Relation ist Ethemet Address MAC IP Address DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 10 88 70 2 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 m Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOOTP DHCP r Status Entries Sent 10 88 70 2 to Ethemet address 00 00 BC 21 20 14 1 of 256 You will see the Save As Dialog 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Figure 46 Save As Dialog Box Ts 2x Save in Sy Boolp Server y amp a E File name Joortral system configuration Save as type Bootp Config Files bpc gt Cancel 4 2 Select the folder you want to Save in 3
122. are relevant to applying them in multiple motor branch circuits The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor The ArmorStart LT product family consists of two types of motor controllers The Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor The Bulletin 294 motor controllers use a variable frequency AC drive to stop start and vary the speed of the motor This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290 291 and 294 products as either motor controllers or just controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Multiple Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group Installation General Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and motor disconnecting means The Underwriters Laboratories UL listing for each motor controller confirms that the motor controller including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means is suitable for motor group installation The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power circuit wiring All of the controllers are suitable for installation in multiple motor branch circuits on industri
123. arity A1 unswitched power dip below 19 2 V for A2 A3 terminal greater than 50 ms or 13 V for greater than 4 ms 4 No No On Sensor Short Trip This error indicates a shorted sensor Correct isolated or remove wiring error prior to shorted input device wiring input restarting the system mistakes 5 Yes Yes Off Phase Imbalance Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a current Check the power system for current imbalance and imbalance in one of the phases correct Correct phase imbalance or disable fault using ProtectFltEnable Parameter 42 6 No No On Non Volatile Memory This is a major fault which renders the 1 If the fault was initiated by a transient power Trip ArmorStart LT inoperable Possible causes cycling may clear the problem of this fault are transients induced during 2 This fault may be reset by a SetToDefaults Non Volatile Storage NVS routines Parameter 68 3 Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required J Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 161 Chapter5 Diagnostics Table 27 Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E 291E Blink Bulletin 290E 291E Pattern Auto Reset Disable Default Trip Status Description Action 8 No Yes Off Jam Trip During normal running after starting 1 Check for the source of the jam for example period the RMS current draw exceeds the excessive load or mechanical transmi
124. arks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Supersedes Publication 290E UM001A EN P December 2011 Copyright 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
125. at Table 30 permits to protect the smallest conductor and 3 the fuse complies with the maximum fuse ratings of all of the controllers 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A Explanatory Example Figure 60 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does lt i fi not exceed the values in Table 7 2 10 4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit Pen eRT Branchcrait shownasdottedlines all ofthe conductors on the load side c shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit of the single set of fuses is OOo OS eee cee cce gece cccopeccoceegecoocegesooccg Suitable for Motor Group Installation Each motor controller and overload device is Max Ratings _ listed for group Sym Amps RMS SKA 10KA Pi 4 k P Fuse ASA 45A installation with specified maximum branch circuit Type CC Jand T fuses only protection YHP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 i a Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 a a Hameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate 7 2 10 4 1 D
126. ation Units x xx Amps Minimum Value See Table 23 Maximum Value See Table 23 Default Value See Table 23 Table 23 FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values with indicated setting precision FLA Current Range A Default Value CatNo 460V AC Minimum Value Maximum Value 290E 1_ FA_ 3 Hp 0 24 3 5 0 24 290E 1_ FB_ 5 Hp 1 1 76 1 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 111 Chapter 4 112 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters OLResetLevel This parameter determines the Thermal Capacity which an overload can be cleared OverloadClass This parameter provides the overload trip classification 1 10 2 15 3 20 Starter Protection Group ProtFitResetMode This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode 0 Manual 1 Automatic TripStatus This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BYTE Group Basic Configuration Units TCU Minimum Value 75 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 75 Parameter Number 30 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Basic Configuration Units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule
127. ational Configuration UINT Unique value depending on output of the parameter 9 Get a Consistency Value checksum algorithm 102 Get Build UDINT Firmware Build Number See product code definitions in Table 32 Product Codes and Name Strings Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 195 AppendixB CIP Information Extended Device Status Field bits 4 7 in Status Instance Attribute 5 on previous page Value Description 0 Self testing or unknown 1 Firmware update in progress 2 At least one faulted 1 0 connection 3 No 1 0 connections established 4 Non volatile configuration bad 5 Major fault either bit 10 or bit 11 is true 1 6 At least one 1 0 connection in run mode 7 At least one 1 0 connection established all in idle mode The following common services will be implemented for the Identity Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All 0x05 No Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002 No class or instance attributes will be supported The message router object exists only to route explicit messages to other objects Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 The following class attribute is supported for the Assembly Object The following static Assembly instance attributes will be supported for each Assembly instance Attribute ID Access Rule Na
128. atus Pt02Data User configured 1 0 status Pt03Data User configured 1 0 status Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO 1 Pt04Data Pt05Data User configured 1 0 status Pt0ODeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt01DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt02DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt03DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt04DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status PtOSDeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt06DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt07DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt08DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status PtO9DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt10DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt11DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt12DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt13DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt14DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt15DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Int00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network analog output OutputCurrent VFD output current Parameter 3 OutputVoltage VFD output voltage Parameter 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Device Input Status Tags Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Tag Description Use DCBusVoltage VFD DC bus voltage Parameter 5 SwitchedVoltageLevel Switched control power voltage Parameter 11 UnswitchedVoltageLevel Unswitched control power voltage Parameter 12 InternalFanRPM VFD fan speed Parameter 13 OperatingH
129. ault Amps Units x x Amps 294_FD1P5 0 5 0 4 0 15 Minimum Value 0 294_FD2P5 1 0 0 75 0 2 5 Maximum Value Cat No Dependent 294_FD4P2 2 0 1 5 0 3 6 Default Value Cat No Max Output CurrentLimit Parameter Number 31 Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Motor and Control Cat No Hp kW Units x x Amps 294_FD1P5 0 5 Hp Min 0 Max 2 7 Default 2 2 Minimum Value 0 294_FD2P5 1 0 Hp Min 0 Max 4 5 Default 3 7 Maximum Value Cat No Dependent 294_FD4P2 2 0 Hp Min 0 Max 7 5 Default 6 3 Default Value Cat No Dependent StopMode Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT are the following 0 RampToStop Stop command clears active fault 1 Coast to Stop Stop command clears active fault 2 DCBrake DC Injection Braking Stop Stop command clears active fault 3 DCBrakeAuto DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 75 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded Parameter Number 32 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Motor and Control Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 0 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Speed Control Group SpeedReference Sets the source of the speed reference 0 Logix Network or DeviceLogix 1
130. auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used e This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking DC Brake Level Time Stop Command Stop Command ReverseDisable Parameter Number 77 Related Parameters Stop drive before changing this parameter Access Rule GET SET Enables disables the function that allows Data Type UINT the direction of the motor rotation to be changed Group Advanced Config 0 Enabled Units 1 Disabled Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 FlyingStartEn Parameter Number 78 A Rul GET SET Sets the condition that allows the drive ee i to reconnect to a spinning motor Data Type UINT at actual RPM 0 Disabled Group Advanced Config 1 Enabled Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 149 Chapter 4 150 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Compensation Enables disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability 0 Disabled 1 Electrical Default Some drive motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non sinusoidal motor currents This setting attempts to correct this condition 2 Mechanical Some motor load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator
131. ay should be 6 in 16 cm e Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation e Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits e Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 3 in 8 cm e Minimum spacing between 3 phase power cabling and Ethernet or I O cabling should be at least 6 in 16 cm to avoid noise issues unless properly shielded Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Grounding Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 An effectively grounded product is one that is intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons as defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70 Article 100B Grounding is done for two basic reasons safety defined above and noise containment or reduction While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may sometimes share the same path and components they should be considered different circuits with different requirements Grounding Safety Grounds The object of safety grounding is to ensure that all metalwork is at the same ground or Earth potential at power frequencies Impedance between the drive and the building scheme ground must conform
132. c Discharge 4 kV contact 8 kV air EN 60947 4 1 Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10V m 80 MHz 1 GHz 10V m 1 4 GHz 2 GHz 2 kV Power Fast Transient 2 kV PE A 1 kV Communication and control Immunity Surge Transient 1 KV 12 4 2 KV 2 y earth When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of same wire AWG 168 Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance P66 UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1 3 IP66 UL Type 4 12 available with G1 and G3 gland option 10V 150 kHz 80 MHz Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Specifications Chapter 6 Standards Compliance and Certifications UL CSA EN IEC Other Agencies Standards Compliance UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment EN 60947 4 1 Low Voltage Switchgear ma oe ee e i ODVA for EtherNet IP and DeviceNet Certifications cULus File No E3125 Guide NLDX NLDX7 Communication Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage 250V Operating Dielectric Withstand UL NEMA 1500V AC IEC 2000V AC EtherNet IP ODVA Conformance Testing EtherNet IP Interoperability Performance Per A9 PF 2 1 Ethernet Communication Rate 10 100 Mbps half or full duplex Ethernet Ports 2 embedded switch Ethernet Network Topologies Supported Star Tree Linear and Ring Device Level Ring Support Beacon Performance IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock Ethernet Co
133. c documentation f Narumentatinn An amendment nr addendum ta thie FINA maw C do not accept the terms in the license agreement lt Back Cancel 12 Then click on Next to proceed to installation je RSL ogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Program Maintenance Install or remove RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles _ gia Install RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles from media g gt t E Uninstall RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 13 Select Install to start installation ie RSL ogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Ready to Configure RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles The wizard is ready to configure RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Install these RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Group a Rockwell Automation ArmorStart LT M eer Version Installation Status Software Version 1 01 0 Installed lt gt IE RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles The program features you selected are being configured Please wait while the Setup Wizard installs the RSLogx 5000 Moduie Profiles This may take several minutes ie RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Starting RSLogn 5000 Module Profiles configuratio Configuring RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles ali K
134. ce Brake Connection B2 When internal power supply option is selected no connection is made here Available only with Bulletin 294E Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 45 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Table 8 Power Control and Ground Wire Capacity and the Tightening Torque Requirements Wire Size 2 18 10 AWG 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal Power Terminals Tightening Torque 10 6 2 Ibein 1 2 0 2 Nem i Wire Size 18 10 AWG 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal Motor Terminals Tightening Torque 10 6 2 Ibein 1 2 0 2 Nem R Wire Size 2 18 10 AWG 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal Control Terminals Tightening Torque 10 6 2 Ibein 1 2 0 2 Nem Wire Size 2 16 10 AWG 1 3 5 2 mm per terminal PE Ground Tightening Torque 18 2 bein 2 0 2 Nem f Wire Size 16 10 AWG 1 0 4 0 mm2 per terminal Source Brake Bulletin 294 Tightening Torque 4 8 2 Ibein 0 5 0 2 Nem IMPORTANT ArmorStart LT is UL Listed for use with 14 AWG wire or preassemble power cable Refer to your local electrical code s when applying 16 AWG wire or cable in a motor circuit Branch Circuit Protection ATTENTION Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the NFPA79 or NFPA70 NEC and any other governing regional or local codes The ArmorStart LT is Underwriters Laboratory UL Group Motor listed Refer
135. ceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut 11 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt1 1DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut 12 AnalogDeviceOut low byte 13 AnalogDeviceOut high byte 14 Param3 OutputCurrent 15 16 Param 4 OutputVoltage 17 18 Param 5 DCBusVoltage 19 20 Param 11 SwitchedVolts OutputSourceV IPS units 21 22 Param 12 UnswitchedVolts SensorSourceV IPS units 23 24 Param 13 InternalFanRPM 25 26 Param 14 ElapesedRunTime 27 28 Param 15 DriveTemperature 29 30 Param 16 TripStatus 31 32 Param 17 WarningStatus 33 PLC Communication Fault Only Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 87 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Table 13 Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly Status Tags Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style ASLT_DEMO Fault ASLT_DEMO 1 Fault DINT Binary ASLT_DEMO TripPresent ASLT_DEMO 1 TripPresent BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO WarningPresent ASLT_DEMO 1 WarningPresent BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO RunningForward ASLT_DEMO 1 RunningForward BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO RunningReverse ASLT_DEMO 1 RunningReverse BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Ready ASLT_DEMO Ready BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO NetworkControlStatus ASLT_DEMO NetworkControlStatus BOOL Decima ASL
136. ceptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Cat No 280 M35F M1 IMPORTANT See the On Machine Connectivity catalog for specific Ethernet media components Figure 24 On Machine Stop Stations 800F 1YMQ 800F 1 MYMQ Enclosure Knockout Illumination Contact Type Quick Connect Type Operator Voltage Configuration Cat No Plastic 24V wae 800F 1YMQ4 Mini Receptacle Metric Twist to Release 1N C 1 N 0 Metal 24V DC 800F 1MYMQ4 ArmorConnect Cable Ratings The ArmorConnect Power Media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Exposed Run ER or MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V Canadian Standards Association CSA STOOW 600V FT2 For additional information regarding ArmorConnect Power Media refer to ArmorStart LT selection guide publication 290 SG001_ EN P Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media When using ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media fuses or circuit breakers may be used for the motor branch circuit ground fault protection if properly sized and allowed by product labeling Circuit Breaker Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 49 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring at 480Y 277 VAC maximum when protected by Cat No 140U D6D3 C30 circuit breaker refer to the Specification
137. ckwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 18 ArmorStart LT Gland Plate Matrix G1 Conduit G2 Media G3 Conduit Standard Daisy Chaining Cat No U S Trade Knock outs IP66 Metric Fittings TEs a Dia 25 5 mm gt Dia 20 5 mm Jea No Internal Power Supply 10n A No Source Brake 25 4 mm ee 0 75 in 3 N A b l 19 05 mm z 9 Dia 25 5 mm 0 75in Dia 20 5 mm a Source Brake 19 05 mm 290 G3 A3 No Internal Power Supply Dia 25 5 mm 1 00 in Dia 20 5 mm G2 Internal Power Supply 054 mal 290 G3 A4 No Source Brake 075in 19 05mm lo Dia 25 5 mm gt 100in ee 290 G3 A5 Internal Power Supply s4mny and Source Brake 075in 19 05 mm So YY 290 G3 A1 Gland Plate Clearances ZY Y Uy User Modified Modifications are not permitted in the keepout region Fitting s should be oriented 66 1 mm VM 80 7mm so that they do not interfere with the enclosure when the gland plate is installed 4 Y yy Torque the gland mounting screws to 12 14 inelb 1 3 1 6 Nem ea i 10 1mm 913mm 11 8mm Connection Locations Figure 19 Internal Power Control and Ground Locations Control Terminals A1A2A3 DOA Line Terminals bi L
138. ction Fault Reset modes manual and automatic When parameter 41 ProtFltResetMode is set to the value 0 Manual mode a manual fault reset must occur before the fault is reset When manual reset mode faults are latched until a fault reset command has been detected either locally or remotely A Manual reset operation is either remotely via the network locally via the Reset button on the front keypad or via a DeviceLogix program A rising edge 0 to 1 transition of the ResetFault tag will attempt a reset A rising edge of the parameter 44 ProtectFltReset will attempt a reset A press of the local blue Reset button on the front keypad will attempt a reset A rising edge of the ResetFault DeviceLogix tag will attempt a reset When ProtFltResetMode is set to the value 1 Automatic auto reset faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 159 Chapter5 Diagnostics Quick Reference The LEDs on the front of the ArmorStart LT provide an indication as to the Tr oubl esh 0 otin g health of the device and network The following is a brief troubleshooting guide Table 26 LED Status Indication Status LED Description Recommended Action PWR Control Status Indicator off The PWR LED is not illuminated at all Verify power is connected and with proper polarity Green Voltage is present No action Flashing Yellow Power has
139. cursor into the grid and left click to drop the function onto the grid From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Input button and select Pt00 from the pull down menu This is the remote start button based on the example I O table Place the input to the left of the RSL function To drop the input on the page left click on the desired position Place the mouse cursor over the tip of Pt00 The tip will turn green Click on the tip when it turns green Move the mouse cursor toward the input of the RSL function A line will follow the cursor When a connection can be made the tip of the RSL function will also turn green Click the on Input and the line will be drawn from Pt00 to the Set Input of the RSL function Note If this was not a valid connection one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing the Esc key at any time will cancel the connection process Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 231 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 11 From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Input button and select Pt01 from the pull down menu This is the remote stop button based on the example I O table 12 Place the input to the left of the RSL function 13 Connect the input to the reset input of the RSL latch File Edit View Communications Tools Help lajoje mo oo u oy i R
140. d Warning Email Object 0x032F Email Object Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001 The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object Revision Attribute ID Get Get 1 2 for Bulletin 290E 291E and 3 for Bulletin 294E Max Instance Two instances of the Identity Object will be supported for Bulletin 290E and Bulletin 291E 3 for Bulletin 294E The following table shows what each instance will represent Instance Revision Attribute Main Control Board The firmware rev of the main control board operating system 3 PowerFlex 4M Bulletin 294E only The firmware revision of the PowerFlex 4M Each instance of the Identity Object will contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Vendor UINT 1 2 Get Device Type UINT 22 30 Get Product Code UINT Product Code specific Revision Structure of 4 Get Major Revision USINT Minor Revision USINT Bit 0 0 Not Owned 1 Owned by Master Bit 2 0 Factory Defaulted 1 Configured Bits 4 7 Extended Status see table below 5 Get Status WORD Bit 8 Minor Recoverable fault Bit 9 Minor Unrecoverable fault Bit 10 Major Recoverable fault Bit 11 Major Unrecoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique number for each device Product Name Structure of 70 Get String Length USINT Product Code specific ASCII String STRING 8 Get State USINT Returns the value 3 Oper
141. d can be used Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 55 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring General Wiring Considerations 56 Service Space The working space around the ArmorStart LT can be minimized as the ArmorStart LT does not require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized In lieu of this service the ArmorStart LT is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lock out tag out procedures have been employed Hand Operation HOA Considerations The Hand Off Auto HOA is a factory installed option that the user may select The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart LT to be installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface by the equipment operator 1 Install not less than 2 ft 0 6 m above the servicing level and within easy reach of the operator who is in a normal working position 2 Install where the operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating the equipment 3 Install where the possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized Where inadvertent operation may cause adverse effects the HOA can be disabled via parameter 67 Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups power control and signal The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect e Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tr
142. d in the ECM The ECM also houses 6 user configurable I O points These six I O points are used for system level control and are accessible via by the communication network or DeviceLogix The user has the flexibility to coordinate the appropriate safety function for their application ArmorStart LT does not provide a safe torque off input Therefore the safety function is configured externally from the controller and based upon the risk assessment For example the risk assessment may require a safety circuit with a high level of performance In this example a safety relay with redundant safety contactors and emergency stop function can be integrated into the machine controls Figure 22 below is an example of this configuration Contact your local Rockwell Automation supplier for additional support regarding the safety circuit or for a risk assessment of your machinery Figure 22 Feeder Pwr Distribution Motor Branch SCGF Motor Branch SCGF Protective Device Protective Device L Ea Scan ed Soca Power Supply Safety Circuit OnOff Safe Emergency Stop Wah respect to ay ArmmorStart LT 3 Phase Pwr Switched Control Pwr ones Control Pwr UL Listed Suitable for Group Installation Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 47 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring ArmorConnect Media 48 For greater flexibility and faster installations the user may also use ArmorConnect
143. d in the event of a protection fault if Parameter 52 OutProtFitState 0 0 OFF 1 0N OutNetFaultState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 55 OutNetFaultValue defines how the starter outputs will respond on an Ethernet fault 0 GoToFaultValue 1 HoldLastState OutNetFaultValue This parameter determines the state that starter outputs when an Ethernet fault occurs and Parameter 54 OutNetFaultState is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N OutNetldleState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 57 OutNetldleValue defines how the starter outputs will respond when a network is idle 0 GoToldleValue 1 HoldLastState Parameter Number 53 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 54 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 55 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 OutNetidleValue This parameter determines the state that starter outputs assumes
144. dentified for such use with the marking Type TC ER Exposed Run shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 6 ft 1 8 m and installed in a good workman like manner Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable While the ArmorStart LT is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments the following must be taken into consideration when locating the ArmorStart LT in the application e Cables including those for control voltage including 24V DC and communications are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis e Location of the ArmorStart LT to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered e Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and or damage e Ifconduit or other raceways are not used it is recommended that strain relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and marked Open Wiring Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type TC ER an
145. downloaded and the Downloading dialog box will show the progress Downloading 17 Upon completion select Run Mode as per shown Rem Prog ay F Program Mode No Forces Go Offline No Edits ah 4 i aoe j Test Mode Controller Properties 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 18 Double click on the Armorstart_LT at the Controller Organizer Controller Organizer Controller Armorstart_LT_Test Tasks Motion Groups EI Add On Instructions J Data Types Trends amp 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L63 Armorstart_LT_Test E i 1 1756 EN2TR EN2TR_32 gs Ethernet J 1756 EN2TR EN2TR_32 fl 294E FD2P52 4 Srmorstart_LT_36 19 Proceed to the Status to check the status of the ArmorStart LT Geet ERT Connection Module Info Motor Protection amp Control Starter User 1 0 Speed Control User 1 0 Po 1 Pth 1Pt2 Fauk Configuration Ready Fau Status Bee Internet Protocol not Port Conkigution te i i Network LPI L Pt4 LPS Armorstart_LT_Test wet Be Miscellaneous Data Unt Data Name ArmorStart 294E 1 Output Current A Switched Vokage eeii Y Description Location Output Voktage DII voc Unswched vorace BEDDET v MAC ID 00 00 8C 86 05 28 DC Bus Voltage y Drive Temperature t Main Rev 1 001 Build 38 SubRev1 1 060 Fan Speed J Bi RPM Elapsed Run Time ij Hours asna aE Stat Pree 20 Double click on the Controller
146. e local logic network fault and idle conditions and protection fault conditions An output point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value attribute Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 207 Appendix B 208 The following state transition diagram is used for an unbound Bulletin 290E Figure 63 State Transition for Unbound Bulletin 290E Non Existent Power off Power up Connection Available Transitions to EE Established rotection Faul DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established Protection Fault Reset Protection Fault Receive Data Protection Fault Receive Idle Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 DNet Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault DNet Fault CIP Information Appendix B The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of Bound DOPs Figure 64 State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E Pr Fault Action Ignore Protection Yes Fault Yes Unrecoverable Yes Network Network Fault Fault Override Return Object State Yes Yes Conflict Yes Ignore lt gt Message Comm Yes Override Yes Yes lt a gt G Use PrFault Action amp PrFault Value Logic Enabled Available Clear Value Perform LEO Function Apply Force Value Apply Value va Use DNFault Action amp DNFault Value Use DNidle
147. e 1 0 Brd A failure has been detected in the drive control and 1 0 section 122 34 Restart Retries Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded 33 35 Drive Aux In Flt The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart 2 36 Fault 36 37 Drv Param Reset Internal Drive Parameters Parameters gt 100 have been defaulted 48 38 Fault 38 39 Fault 39 40 Unknown Fault Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 221 AppendixB CIP Information DPI Alarm Object CLASS CODE 0x0098 This object provides access to warning information within the device The following class attributes will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Class Revision UINT 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT 1 3 Set Alarm Cmd Write USINT 0 NOP 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Queue H et Nam tne Read UN Done eran etree aa 6 Get Number of Recorded Alarms UINT The number of faults recorded in the fault queue A single instance of the DPI Alarm Object will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 Get Full All Info Struct of Alarm Code UINT See Tables below Alarm Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT Alarm Text STRING See Tables below Alarm Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD Help Object Interface USINT Alarm Data 1 Get Basic Info Struct of Alarm Code UINT See Tables below Alarm Source
148. e Aion Arnoia LY Wh I oar eae fos oem eae Ri Please wait while the Setup Wizard installs the RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles This may take several minutes Status PTTTiitiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiy 291E FAZ AsmorStait LT Reverser 0 244 3 5A 24V DC a 290E FBZ ArmorStart LT DOL 1 1A 7 6A 24V DC 290E FAZ AsmnorStart LT DOL 0 244 3 54 24V DC Automation ArmorStatt LT Module Profiles version 1 02 1 install successful 5000 Module Profiles configuration complete lt Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 241 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 15 To complete click on Finish i RSL ogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Complete The RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup Wizard configuration tasks have completed Click Finish to exit the Use of the AOP 1 Start the RSLogix5000 from Start gt Rockwell Software gt RSLogix 5000 in RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series gt RSLogix 5000 Ga FactoryTalk Administration Console Utreware E RSLogix 500 English Fi e ccw All Programs 2 Start a new project by clicking on the icon Me De e pea ve ee le ae ow esu e 75a 79 Ea ata T See ve a S gt ERTEKE STET B 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C 3 In the controller dialog box enter the appropriate information of the controller Then click OK to proceed New Controller Alle
149. e ArmorStart LT product family for EtherNet IP Table 32 Product Codes and Name Strings Product Current Integrated Code Rating Identity Object Name String Power Supply 0x301 0 24 3 5 amps ArmorStart 290E 0 24 3 5A No 0x302 1 1 7 6 amps ArmorStart 290E 1 1 7 6A No 0x311 0 24 3 5 amps ArmorStart 290EP 0 24 3 5A Yes 0x312 1 1 7 6 amps ArmorStart 290EP 1 1 7 6A Yes 0x341 0 24 3 5 amps ArmorStart 291E 0 24 3 5A No 0x342 1 1 7 6 amps ArmorStart 291E 1 1 7 6A No 0x351 0 24 3 5 amps ArmorStart 291EP 0 24 3 5A Yes 0x352 1 1 7 6 amps ArmorStart 291EP 1 1 7 6A Yes 0x3 2 0 5 2 5 amps ArmorStart 294E 0 5 Hp No 0x3C4 1 1 5 5 amps ArmorStart 294E 1 0 Hp No 0x3C6 3 2 16 amps ArmorStart 294E 2 0 Hp No 0x3D2 0 5 2 5 amps ArmorStart 294EP 0 5 Hp Yes 0x3D4 1 1 5 5 amps ArmorStart 294EP 1 0 Hp Yes 0x3D6 3 2 16 amps ArmorStart 294EP 2 0 Hp Yes Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 193 AppendixB CIP Information CIP Explicit Connection Behavior CIP Object Requirements 194 The ArmorStart LT allows run jog and user outputs to be driven by connected explicit messages when no I O connection exists or when a I O connection exists in the idle state a single EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection will be allowed to send explicit control messages via an Active Explicit connection An EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection bec
150. e Data Type Value 0 Get Full All Info Struct of Fault Code UINT See Tables below Fault Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT Fault Text BYTE 16 See Tables below Fault Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULDINT Timer Descriptor WORD Help Object Instance USINT Fault Data Array 5 of 32 bit fault data Snapshot data values 1 Get Basic Info Struct of Fault Code UINT See Tables below Fault Source Struct of DPI Port Number USINT 0 Device Object Instance USINT Fault Time Stamp Struct of Timer Value ULINT Timer Descriptor WORD 3 Get Help Text STRING See Tables below The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single The table below lists Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reverse rs Table 33 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 1 Fault 1 2 User Defined User defined trip has occurred 3 Overload Trip Load has drawn excessive current based on trip class selected 4 Fault 4 5 Phase Loss Trip Indicates missing supply phase This fault can be disabled 6 Jam Trip Motor current above jam level for more than jam trip delay time 7 Underload Trip Motor current below UL level for more than UL t
151. e Parameters Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X RunForward X RunReverse X Out00 X Out01 X Out02 X Out03 X Out04 X Out05 X JogForward X JogReverse X Accel2 X Decel2 X Command Freq X X X Reserved OutputSourceV IPS Parameter Number 11 SwitchedVolts Access h le GET This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT switched control voltage across terminals AI A2 Group Basic Status IPS available voltage on User Output Pin Units xxx Volts 4 for all 1 0 points Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 SensorSourceV IPS Parameter Number 12 UnswitchedVolts Access fule GET This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT unswitched control voltage across terminals A2 A3 Group Basic Status IPS available voltage on input Sensor Units x xx Volts Source Pin 1 for all 1 0 points Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 InternalFanRPM This parameter determines the Revolutions Per Minute RPM of the internal cooling fan ElapsedRunTime This parameter determines the accumulated run time displayed in 10 hour
152. e full load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full load current ratings of all other connected motors Analysis Referring to Figure 62 a b and c explain the method for calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these conductors input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers a input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers b and combined load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E 291E and 294E controllers c The currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers For the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers these are the same as the output motor currents For the Bulletin 294E controllers these currents are the rated input currents The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature exceeding 30 C or more than three current carrying conductors in a cable or raceway In a particular application these conditions of use may require derating of the ampacity given in Table 12 5 1 This example assumes that under the conditions of use both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the application This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 9 5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 27 4 A 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E Controllers a Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 2
153. e listed for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit breakers this appendix considers only fuses This is done to avoid repetitive explanations with minor but necessary qualifications for circuit breakers Generally the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time circuit breakers Third all references unless indicated otherwise are to NFPA 79 2012 Figure 58 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Electrical Supply Disconnecting Means Final Overcurrent gt lt Single Set of Fuses Device Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet s 70 100 NFPA 79 3 3 10 Branch Circuit The Circuit Any Mixture of Motor Controller p 4 fmanan Technologies HP 2HP 5HP 5HP 1HP Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294 Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 15 20 Class 10 Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate Nameplate ara Each Controller is Listed for Group Installation with Specified MaximuM beemrnnffemrrneentneenfrnnctcnnnnnrlf enn Protection Two or More Motors with any Mixture or Power Ratings This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that
154. ectro Mechanical Brake Option Is product supplied with this option The figure below is an example of the Module Definition page Module Definition am Fg Options T ey iae e Revision fix 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Modus User 1 0 ENN MAN lN o 2 Output Input Input gt lO l VN 3 s input gt Input gt Input Cook Cancel Help Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module as shown in the RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration tree to the physical module before I O communication begins You can use electronic keying to help prevent communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected Typically three keying options are available e Exact Match Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes that is Vendor Product Type Product Code catalog number Major Revision and Minor Revision of the physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to establish communication e Compatible Keying Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or reject communication Compatible Keying is the default setting e Disable Keying Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a module ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury
155. ed when switched state of the control voltage When LED is and unswitched control power is within its or unswitched control power is outside its off switched and or unswitched power is specified limits and has the proper polarity specified limits or has incorrect polarity not present RUN FLT LED The bicolor green red LED combines the Solid green is illuminated when a Run The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault functions of the Run and Fault LEDs command is present pattern when a protection fault trip condition is present See Table 6 for fault blink patterns NS Network Status LED The bicolor green red LED indicates the status of the CIP network connection See Network Status Indicator for further information Flashing bicolor red green indicates a self test on power up Flashing green indicates an IP address is configured no CIP connections are established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Steady green indicates at least one CIP connection is established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Flashing red indicates the connection has timed out Steady Red indicates a duplicate IP Address detected LS1 and LS2 Link Status LEDs The bicolor green yellow LED shows the activity link status of each EtherNet IP port Solid green is illuminated when a link has been established at 100 Mbps Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has been establi
156. efault to use the utility To configure your adapter using the BootP DHCP utility perform the following steps 1 Run the BootP DHCP software In the BOOTP DHCP Request History panel you will see the Ethernet Mac addresses of the devices issuing requests Note the Ethernet Mac address for a device can be found on the product label Figure 41 BOOTP DHCP Request History Panel er File Tools Help m Request History Clear Hislory Add to Relation List hrmin sec Type _ _Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 8 09 34 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 09 26 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 09 22 DHCP 00 00 8C 21 20 14 8 09 13 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 8 08 57 DHCP 00 00 BC 21 20 14 m Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOOTP DHCP Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description Unable to service DHCP request from 00 00 BC 21 20 14 0 of 256 Status Entries 2 Double click the Ethernet Mac address of the device you want to configure You will see the New Entry dialog with the device s Ethernet Address MAC Figure 42 New Entry Dialog Box x Ethernet Address MAC fo0 00 BC 21 20 14 IPAddess 10 88 70 2Q Hostname Description l Caneel 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 3 Enter the IP Address you want to assig
157. engine Pt14Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt15Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Int00Deviceln Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 89 Chapter 3 90 Product Commissioning Table 15 Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation Device Input Status Tags Fault Tag Description Use Communication fault between PLC and device all 1s fault all 0s normal TripPresent Fault exists within unit WarningPresent Warning of potential fault RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse Ready Control and 3 phase power present NetworkControlStatus Start and Stop command comes from network PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging NetworkReferenceStatus Speed reference comes from the network not DeviceLogix AtReference At commanded speed reference DeviceLogixEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled KeypadAuto HOA is in Auto mode KeypadOff HOA is in Off mode KeypadHand HOA is in Hand mode KeypadJogging HOA is in Jog mode DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed BrakeContactorStatus Source brake contactor status 1 close 0 open OutputFrequency VFD frequency Pt0OData User configured 1 0 status Pt01Data User configured 1 0 st
158. er Defined Trip This fault is generated either in response This fault is generated based on user configuration to the rising edge of user input 0 5 This fault may be reset after the condition that caused Input00Function Input 05Function it is removed For example the Auxiliary Input goes Parameter 58 63 or by DeviceLogix low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low 16 No No On Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious Power cycle to correct If fault persists the ArmorStart hardware problem exists LT requires replacement 162 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 294E Faults Diagnostics Chapter 5 Bulletin 294E faults are detected by the main control board and or the internal drive When there is an internal drive fault the main control board simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state Writing a value to ProtFltResetMode Parameter 41 determines auto reset ability for some faults The auto reset ability of faults that are generated on the drive are controlled by AutoRestartI ries Parameter 84 and AutoRestar Delay Parameter 85 Auto Reset Table 28 Auto Reset Ability Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Auto Reset Function Description Drive Control Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs and AutoRestartIries Parameter 84 is set to a value greater than
159. es the special function for User Input 2 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Input03Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 3 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Input04Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 4 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Inpu
160. essive heating due to motor overloads or failure to start Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 189 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery 7 3 1 1 Motors Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with Article 430 Part III of NFPA 70 Analysis Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral overload relay This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430 Part III of NFPA 70 Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors appropriately see Requirement 5 ensures the overload relays when set according to 7 3 1 1 will protect the conductors against overheating due to motor overloads Supplementary Note Each individual controller overload relay directly protects the conductors connected to the input and output of that controller and the motor that the controller supplies The combined load conductor is protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays which remove s the overloaded motor s before the combined load conductor overheats 5 Requirement Conductor Ampacity The minimum ampacity of conductors Text 12 5 3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the motor full load current rating 12 5 4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of th
161. et to 1 Disable The keypad OFF button can not be disabled An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On Off The motor brake contactor is actuated via the internal power which supplies L1 and L2 voltage to the mechanical brake in the motor The source brake can be configured for independent control via parameter configuration The internal contactor electromechanical motor brake and associated motor branch cable are protected by the branch circuit protective device There is no resettable or replaceable protective device in ArmorStart LT that the Source Brake function is still operational prior to putting the equipment back in service If the source brake function is not working properly loss of brake function or motor damage can occur i WARNING If the branch circuit protective device trips the user must ensure Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Receiving Unpacking Inspecting Storing Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company Check the item s received against the purchase order If any items are damaged it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking it is also the responsibility of the user to notify the f
162. eter 49 lOPointConfiguration is set to Output The RUN FLT LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a protection fault trip condition is present The LED will blink in 0 5 second intervals when indicating a fault code Once the pattern is finished there will be a 2 second pause after which the pattern will be repeated Bulletin 290E 291E Faults Bulletin 290E 291E faults are detected by the main control board When the ProtFltResetMode Parameter 41 is set to the value 1 Automatic the auto resettable faults in the table will reset automatically when the fault condition is no longer present Table 27 Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E 291E Blink Bulletin 290E 291E Pattern Auto Reset Disable Default Trip Status Description Action 1 Yes No On Overload Trip The load has drawn excessive current and Verify that the load is operating correctly and is based on the trip class selected the device properly set up FLASetting Parameter 28 has tripped OLResetLevel Parameter 29 The fault may be reset only after the motor has sufficiently cooled 2 Yes Yes Off Phase Loss Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a missing This fault is generated by monitoring the relative phase levels of the 3 phase currents Correct phase imbalance or disable fault using ProtectFltEnable Parameter 42 3 Yes No On Under Power Trip The ArmorStart LT detected switched or Check control voltage wiring and proper pol
163. etin 294E units The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of Distributed Starter that the control board is connected to The following instance attributes will be implemented for all parameter attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Value Specified in Descriptor 2 Get Link Path Size USINT Array of 3 Get Link Path BYTE EPATH 4 Get Descriptor WORD 5 Get Data Type EPATH 6 Get Data Size USINT 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING 10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor 11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor 12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor 13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT 15 Get Scaling Base UINT 16 Get Scaling Offset INT 212 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 18 Get Divisor Link UINT 19 Get Base Link UINT 20 Get Offset Link UINT 21 Get Decimal Precision USINT Parameter Group Object The following services will be implemented for the Parameter Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_At
164. eviceNet G1 Conduit entry G2 ArmorConnect G3 Gland Kits c Enclosure Type Code Description g F UL Type 4 120 Option 1 Code Description 3 Hand Off Auto selector keypad 3FR Hand Off Auto selector keypad with Forward Reverse d Overload Selection Code Description A 0 25 3 5A B 1 1 7 6A h Option 2 Code Description blank No option P66 UL Type 4 is available with all gland options UL Type 4 12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option See selection guide 290 SG001_ EN P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering Leave blank unless there is a customer specific option defined by the factory 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 ArmorStart LT Characteristics Figure 5 Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT LockOut TagOut Provision vag Hand Off Auto Keypad optional COO ma B rioa 5s IP Address Switches Status and Diagnostic LEDs Gland Plate Conduit Cord Grip or ArmorConnect Media optional ECM Electronic Control Module 6 Configurable 1 05 o aum o i a Protective Anne Dual Port EtherNet IP This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector Bottom View when DeviceNet communication is selected Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 25 Chapter1 Product Overview Catalog Number Expla nation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes This basic explanation
165. fallen below minimum acceptable level Verify that the control power is between 19 2 and 26V DC RUN FLT Status Indicator off The RUN FLT LED is not illuminated when a Run command has Verify that PLC is in Run mode Verify that the correct run been issued bit is being controlled Verify that a stop condition does not exist Green Valid start command No action Flashing Red Protection fault Count flashes and refer to Table 27 and 28 MS Module Status Indicator Off The MS LED is not illuminated Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network Steady Green Device configured and operational No action Flashing Green Device IP Address has not been configured Configure IP Address Flashing Red Resettable protection fault exists Verify fault by reviewing TripStatus Parameter 16 and TripLog0 4 Parameters 18 22 Correct and press the blue reset button Solid Red Non resettable protection fault exists Verify fault by reviewing TripStatus Parameter 16 and TripLog0 4 Parameters 18 22 Correct and cycle control power switched and unswitched Flashes Green Red Self test on power up No action NS Network Status Indicator Off The NS LED is not illuminated Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network Steady Green CIP connection is established No action Flashing Green An IP address is configured but n
166. fer space in bytes available at this time Class 1 Connections Class 1 connections are used to transfer I O data and can be established to the assembly object instances Each Class 1 connection establishes two data transports one consuming and one producing The heartbeat instances are used for connections that shall access only inputs Class 1 uses UDP transport e Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 4 Total for exclusive owner input only listen only e Supported API 2 3200 ms e T gt O Connection type Point to point multicast e O gt T Connection type Point to point e Supported trigger type Cyclic Change of state When all supported connections are used the error code Connection Manager cannot support any more connections shall be returned Exclusive Owner Connection This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall not be dependent on any other connection Only one exclusive owner connection can be opened against the module Ifan exclusive owner connection is already opened Connection in Use General Status 0x01 Extend Status 0x0100 shall be returned an error code e Connection point O gt T shall be Assembly object Instance 3 150 or 154 e Connection point T gt O shall be Assembly object Instance 52 152 or 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Input On
167. fora total of 17 9 A Third add the result from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27 4 A Finally the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27 4 A Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 191 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Supplementary Note 1 The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non sinusoidal input currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply The value specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of possible supply impedances For this reason the magnitude of current measured on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 High Level Product Description Appendix B CIP Information The ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP is an extension of the ArmorStart LT DeviceNet Three product types offered Table 31 ArmorStart LT Distributed Starter Type Bulletin Number Distributed Starter Type 290E DOL 291E Reversing 294E V Hz Product Codes and Name Strings The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added to th
168. g Chapter 3 Once complete the new ArmorStart LT will appear in the Ethernet tree If there are multiple ArmorStart LTs with similar configurations utilize the copy paste function and update only those parameters that change between units amp j 1 0 Configuration 2 6 Backplane 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis fa 1 1789 160 ASLT_DEMO2 S 2 EtherNet IP EIP_Card gy Ethernet j 294E DiPsz A AST or f EtherNet IP EIP_Card ff 3 1789 MoDULE 10 Hen Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Module Defined T g Delete Del A ASLT_DEMO I A ASLT_DEMO 0 A ASLT_DEMO C Description om Properties Alt Enter Module Fault Cross Reference Ctrl E The final step is to download your project to the controller and the ArmorStart LT Define the path to the PLC and then download aca x 4 a e Ve x Offline D E RUN E EA Pan AB Veran SEs No Forces b e No Edits a he gt 4 wn KeK KK K RSLogix 5000 Add On Profile The Add On Profile AOP for ArmorStart LT consists of several standard pages and multiple product specific pages for configuration within RS Logix 5000 In addition the AOP will automatically create descriptive tag names for the input and output assemblies The following table lists the available AOPs for ArmorStart LT when adding a new module in RS Logix 5000 Catalog Number AOP Description 290E FAZ ArmorStart LT DOL 0 24 3 5 A 24V DC 290E FBZ ArmorStart LT DOL
169. g resets the counter 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled InternalFreq Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 33 Speed Reference 1 InternalFreq When enabled this parameter will change the frequency command in real time SkipFrequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate SkipFrqBand Determines the band width around Parameter 73 SkipFrequency Parameter 74 SkipFreqBand is split applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency A setting of 0 0 disables this parameter Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 71 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 72 Related Parameters 33 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 60 0 Parameter Number 73 Related Parameters 74 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Hz Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 400 Hz Default Value 0 Hz Parameter Number 74 Related Parameters 73 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 30 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 147 Chapter 4 148
170. gStatus ASLT_DEMO 1 WarningStatus INT Binary Table 14 Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation Device Output Command Tags Tag Description Use RunForward Command VFD forward RunReverse Command VFD reverse ResetFault Fault reset JogForward Command Jog forward per internal frequency JogReverse Command Jog reverse per internal frequency Pt0OData If user defined as output commnd output 0 Pt01Data If user defined as output commnd output 0 Pt02Data If user defined as output commnd output 0 Pt03Data If user defined as output commnd output 0 Pt04Data If user defined as output commnd output 0 Pt05Data If user defined as output commnd output 0 Accel2 VFD acceleration ramp 2 Decel2 VFD deceleration ramp 2 FreqCommand Logix command frequency Pt0ODeviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt01Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt02Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt03Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt04Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt05Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt06Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt07Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt08Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine PtO9Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt10Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt11Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt12Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix engine Pt13Deviceln Network input to DeviceLogix
171. ges can cause uncommanded positive speed changes 2 Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times However a Stall Fault is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1 minute If this condition is unacceptable the bus regulator must be disabled 0 Motor0LSelect Parameter Number 82 Related Parameters 29 30 Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection Sets the derating factor for PT Access Rule GET SET motor overload function 0 NoDerating Data Type UINT 1 MinDerating Group Advanced Config 2 MaxDerating Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Figure 55 Overload Trip Curves Ss No Derate Ss Min Derate S Max Derate 100 100 100 E 80 E 80 E 80 g 60 S 60 S 60 S40 5 40 40 O O 5 20 5 20 5 20 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 SWCurrentTrip Enables disables a software instantaneous within 100 ms current trip 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 For 0 5 Hp units Min 0 Max 3 0 Default 0 For 1 0 Hp units Min 0 Max 5 0 Default 0 For 2 0Hp units Min 0 Max 8 4 Default 0 Parameter Number 83 Related Parameter 30 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units x x Amps Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Hp Depende
172. gs D 2 He D gt Conductor Table 7 2 10 4 antar protection 3 Max protection oan neers Fuse 60 Amax E Smallest Ww A any dass Determine conductor 3 5 I fuse class f 4 A a amn and max i a at a A H w w0 ating for V2HP 2HP N SHP N C 3 1HP N 3 150 conductor Fic Res i Fic Fic Fic z protection Vaa aw 76A C76 Vaza 7 2 10 4 2 j Y b cee OI ally H smallest i A CONGUCLOF R ee Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse Table 430 250 of NFPA 70 2011 Figure 62 ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi Motor Branch Circuit Minimum Conductor Ampacity Electrical Supply Minimum Required Ampacity MRA MRA 1 25 Max controller input currents Sum remaining controller input currents Controller input currents I1 12 13 14 15 Max controller input current 13 14 choose 13 as Max either is ok MRA 1 25 13 11 12 14 15 1 25 7 6A 1 8A 5 5A 7 6A 3 0A 274A Combined Load Conductors Min Amp 125 1 8 A Min Amp 125 5 5 A Min Amp 125 7 6A Min Amp 125 7 6 A Min Amp 125 3 0 A Ye HP 2 HP 5 HP Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin 294 294 291 290 294 Min Amp 125 1 1A Min Amp 125 3 4A Min Amp 125 7 6A Min Amp 125 7 6 A Min Amp 125 2 1 A Fic Fic KET TE 6
173. gure 29 Bulletin 290E Full Voltage with IPS At Motor Disconnect Y DOL L1 L2 L3 Disconnect Status Fwd Stat Fwd Contro Sinking Input or Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points Figure 30 Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing with IPS At Motor Disconnect Reverser L1 L2 o 9 L3 Disconnect Status Control PE Sinking Sensor Voltage Input or O Sourcing f D output Do 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points Figure 31 Bulletin 294E VFD with IPS Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 53 Chapter 2 54 Installation and Wiring At Motor Cia Disconnect _ _ _ Q L2 G ra o 4 Drive Enable Disconnect Status PE Sinki hiputo Sensor Voltage Sourcing output 6 User Configurable 1 0 Points Figure 32 Bulletin 294E VFD with IPS SB At Motor Disconnect L1 T1 2 e 2 T2 Q e 13 B Brake Drive Enable H Disconnect Status i 7 zale 16 AWG Minimu
174. he second last trip to occur TripLog3 This parameter provides the third last trip to occur TripLog4 This parameter provides the fourth last trip to occur Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 18 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 19 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 20 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 21 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 109 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters TripLog5 This parameter provides the fifth last trip to occur SnapShotL1Amps This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L1 current at time of last trip SnapShotL2Amps This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L2 current at time of last trip SnapShotL3Amps This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L3 current at time of last trip
175. her control devices are sending JOG a stop command Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop using selected stop mode The ArmorStart LT offers optional factory installed Hand OFF Auto HOA configurations Standard Bulletin 290E and Forward Reverse Bulletin 291E Figure 13 Bulletin 290E Standard HOA Figure 14 Bulletin 291 Forward Reverse HOA HAND o OFF pO J Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 35 Chapter 1 Product Overview 36 Bulletin 290E With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 1 Maintained pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch Current Mode Key Press OFF HAND AUTO AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAND If no fault Motor On OFF Motor turns Off Motor turns Off FAULT PRESENT Motor turns Off Motor turns Off With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 0 Momentary pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch Current Mode Key Press OFF Key HAND AUTO Key NO KEY PRESSED Motor Off AUTO Auto Mode Motor Off HAND If no fault Motor On OFF Motor Off Motor Off PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Motor Off Bulletin 291E With the KeypadMode parameter parameter 66 set to 1 Maintained pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch Current Mode Key Press OFF HAND AUTO FWD REV FWD LED Set REV
176. i scm ee vasama Oae Chor fa 294_ G1 SB 5 kA 480 277 Racin 294_ G2 10 kA 480 277 ee nl ra Type 1 Short Circuit Coordination Size per NFPA 70 NEC or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications 1 0 is configurable to either input or output Assumes zero wire resistance Wire impedance will reduce current inrush Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 173 Chapter6 Specifications Input and Output Ratings Supply Voltage Unswitched power A3 A2 Type of Inputs 24V DC current sinking Connection Type Single keyed M12 quick disconnect Input per Connection T each Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC On State Input Voltage pin 4 10 26 4V DC nominal 24V DC Off State Input Voltage 5V DC On State Input Current pin 4 1 3 7 mA nominal 2 6 mA 24V DC Input Off State Input Current lt 1 5 mA Maximum Sensor Leakage Current lt 2 5 mA Maximum Number of Input Devices 6 Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current pin 1 50mA per point max 300mA total for sourcing one device Sensor Operating Voltage Range 19 2 26V DC RE Off On or On Off 0 5 ms 64 ms Filtering 100 ps DeviceLogix 1 0 Response 2 ms 500 Hz Supply Voltage Switched Power A1 A2 Type of Outputs DC sourcing Load Types Resistive or light inductive Utilization Category IEC DC 1 DC 13 Output State Normally Open N 0 Connection Type Single keyed M12 quick disconnect Out
177. ial number from an RSLogix 5000 programming package i click here Qualify For Update Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 237 Appendix C 238 Using DeviceLogix 4 Upon verification the following screen will appear Click on the link to download the file RSLOGIX 5000 ADD ON PROFILES Step 3 of 3 Qualified to download Below is the RSLogix 5000 Add On Profile file you requested This will take several minutes to download depending upon your modem speed or network connection RA290ArmorStartLt Rel Ver 1 02 001 zip 5 At the pop up dialogue box select Save to save the file 0 of rStartlt Rel Yer_1 02 001 zip from ppo x Getting Fie Information artit _Rel_Ver_1 02 001 zip from pport rockwellautomation com 4 File Download Do you want to open or save this file g Name RA290ArmorStartLt_Rel_Ver_1 02 001 zip Type WinZip File 38 7MB From download support rockwellautomation com E Aways ask before opening this type of file While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially ham your computer If you do not tust the source do not open or save thes file What s the risk 6 Select the folder to save the file and click Save The downloading will start Seen AMEA mes _060875 zip i 4 msrs75m_1_0_11_Beta zip My Recent a My Computer Documents 4 My Documents G Desktop 2 of artLt_Rel_ Ve
178. iceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters 22 Parameter 11 SwitchedVolts 23 OutputSourceV IPS units 24 Parameter 12 UnswitchedVolts 25 SensorSourceV IPS units 26 Parameter 16 TripStatus 27 28 Parameter 17 WarningStstus 29 Instance 154 Instance 154 is the default Output Consumed Assembly for Inverter type Bulletin 294E Distributed Starters Instance 154 Drive Cmd DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunFoward 1 Decel2 Accel2 Out05 Outo4 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 2 CommandFreq Low xxx x Hz 3 CommandFreq High xxx x Hz 4 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 5 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt08Deviceln 6 An00Deviceln lowbyte 7 AnO0Deviceln highbyte Instance 156 Instance 156 is the Exhaustive Drive Status Assembly Instance Instance 156 Drive Status Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters 0 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 AtReference NetRefStatus NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 BrakeStatus DisconnectClosed KeyPadJogging KeyPadHand KeyPadOff Ke
179. imum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 4 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Basic Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 5 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Basic Status Units Percent Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 6 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x4FBF Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 103 Chapter 4 104 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 1 3 TripPresent WarningPresent RunningForward X RunningReverse X Ready X NetControlStatus X Reserved CurrentFlowing DLXEnabled KeyPadAuto X KeyPadOff X KeyPadHand X Xx Reserved X DisconnectClosed X Reserved StarterCommand Parameter Number 7 The parameter provides the Run Command Access Pule SEI status to the starter Data Type WORD Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0x3F07 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4
180. in 291E Bulletin 294E Consumed Network Data PTO00Deviceln PT0ODeviceln PTOODeviceln PT15Deviceln PT15Deviceln PT15Deviceln Discrete Input Points PTO PTOO PTO0 PTOO PTOO PTOO Discrete Output Points RunForward RunForward RunForward RunReverse RunReverse Out00 Out00 Out00 Out05 Out05 Out05 JogForward JogReverse Produced Network Data Pt0ODeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut Pt0ODeviceOut Pt15DeviceOut Pt15DeviceOut Pt15DeviceOut ResetFault ResetFault ResetFault MotionDisable MotionDisable MotionDisable ForceSnapshot ForceSnapshot ForceSnapshot UserDefinedFault UserDefinedFault UserDefinedFault KeypadDisable KeypadDisable KeypadDisable Accel2 Decel2 BrakeRelease Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 233 Appendix C Using DeviceLogix 234 Element Type Bulletin 290E Bulletin 291E Bulletin 294E Faults OverloadTrip OverloadTrip OverloadTrip PhaseShortTrip PhaseShortTrip PhaseShortTrip UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip SensorShortIrip SensorShortTrip SensorShortIrip PhaselmbalTrip PhaselmbalTrip Phaselmbal rip NonVolMemooryTrip NonVolMemooryTrip NonVolMemooryTrip ParamSyncTrip Jamtrip Jamtrip DCBusFaults StallTrip StallTrip StallTrip UnderloadTrip UnderloadTrip UnderloadTrip GroundFault RestartRetries DriveHdwFault OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip War
181. inadvertent disconnection Consult your local codes regarding redundant ground connections and or size of protective earthing conductor The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked f ATTENTION RFI Filter Grounding Due to the presence of an integral EMI Ethern et DeviceNet and DeviceNet Connector M18 1 0 Connections Pin 1 Drain no connection Q Pin 2 VDNET Pin 3 VDNET Pin 4 CAN_H amp Pin 5 CAN_L Ethernet IP Connector D coded M12 1 0 Connector M12 M12 Female Ethernet Connector Pin 1 Sensor Source Voltage Pin 1 Tx Pin 2 Not Used ET 2 Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Common Pin 3 Tx Pin 4 Input or Output 4 3 Pin 4 Rx Pin 5 Not Used Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 63 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring ArmorConnect Power Media Receptacles 64 ArmorStart LT utilizes a M22 male receptacle for power inputs and a M22 female receptacle for motor or motor brake output Motor Connector optional Source Brake Connector optional Incoming Control Power optional 24V DC Only O O Q 092 Incoming Three Phase Power optional Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Pin 1 T1 black Pin 2 T2 white Pin 3 T3 red Pin 4 Ground green yellow Pin 1 Ground green yellow Pin 2 B1 black Pin 3 B2 white Pin 1
182. includes a dual port 10 100 mb s ethernet switch that supports linear or Device Level Ring DLR topology Figure 1 Linear Topology Communication Device Level Ring DLR ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP version offers DLR support with beacon frame performance DLR provides a single fault tolerant network solution for EtherNet IP Figure 2 DLR with Beacon Performance No Fault SS Beacon Frame M Normal Packet Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 Figure 3 DLR with Beacon Performance Fault I Beacon Frame IN BB Normal Packet o Link Status Message In this example the fault is precisely identified by the link status message and the supervisor opens the blocked port to allow network traffic to continue normally IEEE 1588 transparent clock ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP version supports the IEEE 1588 transparent clock when used with precision time protocols PTP A transparent clock measures and adjusts for packet delays therefore removing the negative effects that these variations can cause within a synchronized distributed network of devices Embedded web server ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP version offers a web server that can be accessed via a standard internet browser The web server provides status diagnostics and configuration capabilities E mail notification ArmorStart LT via the embedded web server supports configuration of the Simple Mail T
183. increments 1 10Hrs DriveTemperature This parameter determines the present operating temperature of the power section Trip Status Group TripStatus This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 13 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 14 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 15 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units C Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxFFFF Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 129 Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 Function OverloadTrip PhaseShortTrip UnderPowerTrip SensorShortTrip OverCurrentTrip NonVolMemoryTrip ParamSyncTrip DcBusTrip OpenDisconnect StallTrip Overlemperature GroundFault RestartRetries DriveHdwFault OutputShor
184. ine No Forces gt _ F OK BAT Upload No Edits a i o Download Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 247 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 14 Atthe Who Active window select the 1756 EN2TR then the controller and click on the Download button ba paar AET ccone J B AB ETH Ethernet amp AB_ETHIP 1 Ethernet 3 192 168 1 32 1756 EN2TR 1756 EN2TRIA E Backplane 1756 A4 A RAE CA Update Fara I o oem ree 192 168 1 36 Unrecognized Device ArmorStart 294E 1 0 HP 192 168 1 38 1783 EMSOBT ENet Managed Switch 1763 EMSOBT ENet Managed Switch E Bs AB_SmartGuard 1 DeviceNet AB_VEP 1 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis 15 The Download dialog box will appear click on Download to proceed Download Download offline project Armorstart_LT_Test to the controller Connected Controller Name test Type 1756 L63 B ControlLogix5563 Controller Path AB_ETHIP 1 192 168 1 32 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00574520 Securty No Protection dD DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller aeae eia rie network devices 3id party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation 16 The configuration will be
185. ip high line voltage or transient conditions Bus OverVoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration 3 Extending the DecelTime1 Parameter 37 or DecelTime2 Parameter 70 may also help with this fault 9 Drive No On Stall Trip During starting the motor did not reach 1 Check for source of stall for example excessive Controlled PF 4M Code 6 running speed within the prescribed load or mechanical transmission component period This fault occurs when the drive failure detects a motor stall condition during 2 Increase AccelTime1 Parameter 36 or acceleration AccelTime2 Parameter 69 or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by CurrentLimit Parameter 31 10 Drive No On Over Temperature This fault occurs when the drive detects a Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that Controlled PF 4M Code 8 heat sink over temperature condition ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 C 104 F 11 No No On Ground Fault This fault occurs a current path to earth Check the motor and external wiring to the drive PF 4M Code 13 ground has been detected at one or more output terminals for a grounded condition of the drive output terminals 12 No No On Restart Retries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reseta Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear PF 4M Code 33 fault and resume running for the Check AutoRestartTries Parameter 84 and programmed number of auto retries AutoRestartDelay Parameter
186. is mode Connection Type will include a Backup and Restore feature The Backup selection will store parameter data in the RSLogix 5000 programming file and in the PLC The Restore selection will allow the user to manually re configure a replacement unit e RSLogix 5000 The unit is configured by RSLogix 5000 The AOP controls all parameter configurations Any change made using the webpage will be over written by the PLC configuration When the user changes the Configured By field from Web Page to RSLogix 5000 the values stored by the Backup function will be copied to the configuration in the PLC The Backup Restore will no longer be displayed Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 81 Chapter 3 82 Product Commissioning HOA Keypad Option ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an HOA Keypad The user will specify either Installed or Not Installed When a unit is provided without the HOA keypad this setting should be set to Not Installed which removes the keypad parameters Source Brake Electro Mechanical Brake Option ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an electromechanical EM brake The user will select either Installed or Not Installed When a unit is provided without an EM brake the setting should be set to Not Installed which removes the associated parameters User Configurable 1 0 The ArmorStart LT
187. it5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 2 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln PtO5Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 3 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt08Deviceln 4 AnalogDeviceln low byte 5 AnalogDeviceln high Byte Instance 152 Instance 152 is the Exhaustive Starter Status Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E starters Instance 152 Starter Stat DeviceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters 0 Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 CurrentFlowing NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent 5 DisconnectClosed KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled 6 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00 7 8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut PtOSDeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut PtO3DeviceOut PtO2DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut PtOODeviceOut 9 Pt15DeviceOut Ptl4DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Ptl1DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut PtO9DeviceOut PtO8DeviceOut 10 An00DeviceOut low byte 11 An00DeviceOut high byte 12 7 Parameter 1 PhaseL1Current 14 7 Parameter 2 PhaseL2Current 16 a Parameter 3 PhaseL3 Current 18 7 Parameter 4 AverageCurrent 20 j Parameter 5 ThermalUtilized Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 201 Appendix B CIP Information Instance 152 Starter Stat Dev
188. ith Beacon frame performance e IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock e RSLogix 5000 Add On Profile e 6 user configurable I O points e DeviceLogix e Embedded web server support e Configurable e mail response for fault or alarm events e Optional internal power supply e Optional electromechanical brake contactor e Optional local control via Hand Off Auto keypad e Optional quick disconnect for power and motor connections IMPORTANT Notall options are available for Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Refer to the catalog configurator for details 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Feature Description Product Overview Chapter 1 Standard Features Across Product Family UL Listed Suitable for Group Motor Applications Where NFPA 70 NEC or 79 are required installation standards this Listing allows two or more motors to be connected to the same branch circuit without individual motor branch short circuit or ground fault protection Refer to Appendix A for details At motor disconnect switch ArmorStart LT offers a local ON OFF motor disconnecting means with lockout tagout provision Industrial standards require a local at motor disconnect to be within eye sight of the motor for maintenance or other shutdown reasons Refer to your installation code for details User configurable I O ArmorStart LT offers 6 user configurable I O points to be used with sensors and actuators By default all 6 points are configured a
189. itions during operation Threshold values near the operational levels should be avoided Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 155 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Notes 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Overview Status LEDs and Reset Indicator PWR LED Diagnostics Chapter 5 This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur Figure 57 Status and Diagnostic LEDs and Reset LS1 LS2 MS PWR NS RUN FLT ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually marked LEDs shown in Figure 57 located on the ECM module In addition a local reset is provide for clearing of faults Table 25 details the diagnostic and status LEDs Table 25 ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators Description The bicolor green yellow LED shows the state of the control voltage When LED is off switched and or unswitched power is not present Color_1 Solid green is illuminated when switched and unswitched control power is within its specified limits and has the proper polarity Color_2 Solid yellow is illuminated when switched or unswitched control power is outside its specified limits or has incorrect polarity Flashing yellow indicates line voltage is not present Bulletin 294 units only RUN FLT
190. lish connections to the message router Thereafter the connection is used for explicit messaging Class 3 connections use TCP connections e 16concurrent Class 3 connections will be supported Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0e No Yes Get_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 205 AppendixB CIP Information Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Ox4E No Yes Forward_Close 0x54 No Yes Forward_Open Discrete Input Point CLASS CODE 0x0008 Object The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input Point Object Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 6 Six instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported All instances contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 4 Get Fault Status BOOL 0 0K 1 Fault 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 O0N Discrete Output Point Object Attribute ID Get The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single CLASS CODE 0x0009 The following class at
191. ln Pt08Deviceln 6 AnalogDeviceln low byte 7 AnalogDeviceln high byte Table 11 Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly Command Tags Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style ASLT_DEMO RunForward ASLT_DEMO 0 RunForward BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO RunReverse ASLT_DEMO 0 RunReverse BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO ResetFault ASLT_DEMO 0 ResetFault BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO JogForward ASLT_DEMO 0 JogForward BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO JogReverse ASLT_DEMO 0 JogReverse BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO PtooData ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt00Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pto1Data ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt01Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pto2Data ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt02Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pto3Data ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt03Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pto4Data ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt04Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt05Data ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt05Data BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Accel2 ASLT_DEMO 0 Accel2 BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO Decel2 ASLT_DEMO 0 Decel2 BOOL Decima ASLT_DEMO FreqCommand ASLT_DEMO 0 FreqCommand INT Decima ASLT_DEMO Pt00Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt00Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt01Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt01Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt02Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt02Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt03Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt03Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt04Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt04Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt0SDeviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt05Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt06Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt06Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt07Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt07Deviceln BOOL Decimal ASLT_DEMO Pt08Deviceln ASLT_DEMO 0 Pt08Deviceln BOOL Decimal AS
192. ly Connection This connection is used to read data from the module without controlling the outputs This connection type shall not be dependent on any other connection It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O gt T direction of the Forward_Open be zero there are however no check that this is actually the case IMPORTANT Ifan exclusive owner connection has been opened against the module and times out the input only connection shall time out as well If the exclusive owner connection is properly closed the input only connection shall not be affected e Number of supported input only connections equals four shared with exclusive owner and listen only connection Listen Only Connection This connection is dependent on another connection to exist If that connection Exclusive owner or Input only is closed the listen only connection shall be closed as well It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O gt T direction of the Forward_Open be zero there are however no checks that this is actually the case If no other connection exists when listen only tries to be opened a Controlling connection not open general status 0x01 extend status 0x0119 error message shall be sent e Number of supported listen only connections equals four shared with exclusive owner and input only connection Class 3 Connections Explicit Message Connection Class 3 connections are used to estab
193. m Brake Status 40A BCPD max Brake PE a ee Sensor Voltage Sourcing output Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 Group Motor Installations for When ArmorStart LT is applied according to group motor installation USA and Canada Markets Wiring requirements two or more motors of any rating or controller type are permitted on a single branch circuit Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada IMPORTANT For additional information regarding group motor installations with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller see Appendix A Cable Workmanship Guidelines In addition to conduit and seal tite raceway it is acceptable to utilize cable that is dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs TC ER and Cord STOOW for power and control wiring on ArmorStart LT installations In the USA and Canada installations the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code NEC and National Fire Protection Association NFPA 79 In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection such as struts angles or channels Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC Metal Clad cable and is i
194. mber of Inputs x 50 mA user defined Power Supply Requirements Number of Outputs x 500 mA user defined Maximum Current 275 mA user defined Maximum Power 6 6 W 24V DCx user defined Peak Inrush lt 10 for 35 ms nina ee An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input outputs and logic control Cat No Sym Amps RMS Circuit Breaker Fuse haere 290 1_ 61 or G3 10kA 480V 277 foun a eung 290 1_ G1 or G3 5 kA 480Y 277 ee UL Class fuse maximum 45 A 290 1_ 62 10 KA 480 277 he anon Short Circuit Type 1 Coordination Size per NFPA 70 NEC or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications 1 0 is configurable to either input or output Assumes zero wire resistance Wire impedance will reduce current inrush 166 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Input and Output Ratings Supply Voltage Specifications Chapter 6 Unswitched power A3 A2 Type of Inputs 24V DC current sinking Connection Type Single keyed M12 quick disconnect Input per Connection T each Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC On State Input Voltage pin 4 10 26 4V DC nominal 24V DC Off State Input Voltage 5V DC On State Input Current pin 4 1 3 7 mA 2 6 mA 24V DC Input Off State Input Current lt 1 5mA Maximum Sensor Leakage Current lt 2 5 m Maximum Number of Input Devices 6 Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current pin 1 50 mA per point max 300 mA total for sourcing one device
195. me Data Type Value 1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT Member List Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths Member Data Description UINT Size of Member Data in bits 2 Get Member Path Size UINT Size of Member Path in bytes Member Path aa Member EPATHs for each assembly instance 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Conditional Data Array of BYTE 4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes in attribute 3 100 Get Name String STRING The following services will be implemented for the Assembly Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 1 0 Assemblies The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the ArmrorStart EtherNet IP product Instance Type Description 3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance 52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance 100 Config Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters 101 Config Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters 150 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Bulletin 290E 291E units 152 Produced Exhaustive Produced Status Assembly Instance 154 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type Bulletin 294E units 156 Produced Exhaustive Produced Drive Status Assembly Instance Instance 3
196. me wire AWG Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 175 Chapter6 Specifications Standards Compliance and Certifications UL CSA EN IEC Other Agencies EN 61800 Adjustable Speed Electrical l i Power Drive Systems Part 3 EMC CCC Pending UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment Requirements and Specific Test Methods KCC i Standards Compliance Suitable for Group Installation CE Marked per EMC Directive 2004 108 EC CTick CSA 22 2 No 14 Part 5 1 Safety Requirements Electrical ue i Thermal and Energy CE Marked per Low ODVA for EtherNet IP and DeviceNet Voltage Directive 2005 95 EC Certifications cULus File No E207834 Guides NMMS NMMS7 Communication Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage 250V Operating Dielectric Withstand UL NEMA 1500V AC IEC 2000V AC DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating Range 11 25V DC 24V DC nominal DeviceNet Input Current 50 mA 24V DC DeviceNet Input Current Surge 500 mA peak inrush Baud Rates 125 250 500 kbps 500 m 1630 ft 125 kbps Distance Maximum 200 m 656 ft 250 kbps 100 m 328 ft 500 kbps Auto Baud Rate Identification Yes DeviceNet Group 2 Slave Only Device Type Yes Polled 1 0 Messaging Yes Change of State Messaging Yes Cyclic Messaging Yes Explicit Messaging Yes Full Parameter Object Support Yes Group 4 Off Line Node Recovery Messaging Yes Configuring Consistency Value Yes Unconnected Messaging Man
197. meter Number 37 Related P t 33 36 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases pe ere AE c Access Rule GET SET Maximum i teg Decel Rate Decel Time Data Type UINT Parameter 35 Group Speed Control Maximum Freq Units X X Secs Speed Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 600 0 sae b Time a ae j Default Value 10 0 SCurvePercent Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp Data Type UINT as S Curve Time is added half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp Group Speed Control Units Percentage Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Figure 53 S Curve Example Accel Time 10 Seconds S Curve Setting 50 S Curve Time 10 x 0 5 5 Seconds Total Time 10 5 15 Seconds JogFrequency Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued JogAccelDecel Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Target Target 2 4 1 25 Curve Time b4 2 5 Seconds 50 S Curve I gt gt A 1 2 S Curve Time gt 2 5 Seconds M Total Time to Accelerate Accel Time S Curve Time gt I Parameter Number 39 Related Parameters 35 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setu
198. mines the input which must be absent for this time Data Type USINT before being reported OFF Group User 1 0 Config Units msecs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 0 OutProtFitState Parameter Number 52 a ee Access Rule GET SET This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 53 OutProtFltValue defines Data Type BOOL how the starter outputs will respond when a fault occurs Group User I 0 Config 0 GoloPrFitValue Units 1 IgnorePrFit Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 OutProtFitValue This parameter determines how the starter outputs will be commanded in the event of a protection fault if Parameter 52 OutProtFitState 0 0 OFF 1 0N OutNetFaultState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 55 OutNetFaultValue defines how the starter outputs will respond on an Ethernet fault 0 GoToFaultValue 1 HoldLastState OutNetFaultValue This parameter determines the state of the starter outputs when an Ethernet fault occurs and Parameter 54 OutNetFaultState is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N OutNetldleState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 57 OutNetldleValue defines how the starter outputs will respond when a network is idle 0 GoToldleValue 1 HoldLastState Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4
199. momentary 0 Momentary 1 Maintained KeypadDisable This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons 0 KeypadEnabled 1 KeypadDisabled SetToDefaults This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults 0 NoAction 1 SetToDefaults Parameter Number 65 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 66 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 67 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 68 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Advanced Configuration OLWarningLevel This parameter determines the Overload Warning Level in Thermal Capacity Used TCU JamlInhibitTime This parameter determines the time during motor starting that Jam detection is inhibited JamTripDelay This parameter determines how much time above the Jam Level before the unit will trip JamTripLevel This parameter determines the Jam Trip Level as a perce
200. mple of the Advanced button that provides the user additional functionality Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Auto Generated Tags After you install and configure the AOP the controller tags are generated The tag names are descriptive and automatically generated This greatly simplifies programming The figure below shows an example of the auto generated tags for ArmorStart LT The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto generated names Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 85 Chapter 3 Product Commissioning Table 10 Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 294E Instance 154 Drive Cmd Default Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Decel2 Accel2 Out05 Outo4 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 2 CommandFreq Low xxx x Hz 3 CommandFreq High xxx x Hz 4 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt0ODeviceln 5 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt09Device
201. n 294E units only The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Output Point Object 1 Get Revision UINT 2 2 Get Max Instance UINT 1 One instance of the Analog Output Point object will supported It will represent the Frequency command sent to the PF40 via the DSI link CommandFreq from Assembly 154 is placed in the Value Attribute when it is consumed The Value Attribute can then be overwritten by DeviceLogix Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set Value INT 0 Default cae Size of Appendix encoded path 129 Get Set Input Binding USINT ree date h Array of USINT path means attribute 3 drives the output Otherwise this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 211 Appendix B CIP Information The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Output Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Object Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD err 100 for Bulletin 290E 291E units 9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance UINT 101 for Bull
202. n Bradley 1756 L63 Controll ogix5563 Controller 19 w C Redundancy Enabled Name Armorstart_LT_T est Description Chassis Type 756 44 4 Slot ControlLogis Slot Create In C RSLogix 5000 Projects 4 In the Controller Organizer window find I O Configuration and right click on the 1756 Backplane and select New module Controller Organizer C3 Controller 4rmorstart_LT_Test Tasks 3 Motion Groups 3 Add On Instructions Data Types C3 Trends 3 6 1 0 Configuration ee 1756 Backplane 1756 A Bi 0 1756 163 Armrst J New Module EA Paste trl Ee i Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 243 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix 5 Select Module Dialog box followed by Communications and then select 1756 EN2TR and click OK E Select Module 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Fiber Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge 2 Port Twisted Pair 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Serv By Category 1756 Remote 1 0 RIO Interface SynchLink Interface 6 In the New module dialog box enter the Unit name IP address and slot then click OK E New Module DE General Connection TimeSync Module Info Intemet Protocol Port Configuration
203. n IP address subnet mask and optional Gateway address The rotary network address switches found on the front of the ECM are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default The network Internet Protocol IP address can be set one of three ways e Use the switches located on the module e Use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server such as Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP e Retrieve a static IP address from nonvolatile memory The ArmorStart LT reads these switches first at power up or after a reset to determine if they are set to a valid IP address between 1 254 When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 192 168 1 _ switch setting If the switches are set to an invalid number for example 000 or a value greater than 254 excluding 888 DHCP is enabled The DHCP server will assign the IP address and the Transport Control Protocol TCP parameters The RS Logix 5000 installation provides a BootP DHCP server found in the Rockwell Software Program folder Use Rockwell Automation BootP DHCP server utility version 2 3 or later that ships with RSLogix 5000 or RSLinx software A third party DHCP server can also be used Manually Configure the Network Address Switches Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches Figure 39 Switches on the 1 0 module Remove the black caps to access the rotary switches Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches
204. n requirement of 7 2 10 4 2 Supplementary Note 1 The value specified in Table 30 is the maximum rating of fuse that 7 2 10 4 2 permits to protect that size of conductor The rating of the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 30 for the smallest conductor without further justification However if any controller or other component has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 30 value the Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 187 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their ratings For example as shown in Requirement Three a lower value may be necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified maximum protection is less than the rating that Table 30 permits for the smallest circuit conductor Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more conservative conductor and controller protection However in all cases it is important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors without nuisance opening of the fuse s Supplementary Note 2 The note at b points to the conductor on the output of the Hp Bulletin 294E controller in order to emphasize that the smallest conductor in the circuit includes the
205. n to the device and click OK The device is added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Hostname and Description if applicable Figure 43 Relation List i x Ral BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 C Documents and Settings tiggs Desktopi Booip SE File Tools Help m Request History dd to Relation List Clear History Hostname Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BUOTP DHEP Ethemet Address MAC Type IP Address Hostname Description 00 00 BC 21 20 14 DHCP 10 88 70 2 r Status r Entries Sent 10 88 70 2 to Ethernet address 00 00 BC 21 20 14 1 of 256 When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request History section it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made 4 To assign this configuration to the device highlight the device in the Relation List panel and click the Disable BOOTP DHCP button When power is cycled to the device it uses the configuration you assigned and does not issue a DHCP request 5 To enable DHCP fora device with DHCP disabled highlight the device in the Relation List and click the Enable DHCP button You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to re enable DHCP Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 71 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Figure 44 Enable DHCP Button fq BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 C Documents
206. national copyright laws as described in the about bax Rockwell ok Automation 17 01 19 01 2 From the I O Configuration tree add a New Module 1 0 Configuration amp Backplane 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis fa 1 1789 160 ASLT_DEMO2 SJ 2 EtherNet Ip EIP_Card as Ether 8 z 5 New Module Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 3 From the list of modules find the ArmorStart LT using the catalog number The AOP will include all options therefore the list will only display the base catalog number E Select Module Description Digital Drives E HMI cH Motion Other 290E FAZ ArmorStart LT DOL 0 244 3 54 24 DC Allen Bradley 290E FBZ ArmorStart LT DOL 1 14 7 64 24 DC Allen Bradley 291E FAZ ArmorStart LT Reverser 0 244 3 54 24V DC Allen Bradley 291E FBZ ArmorStart LT Reverser 1 14 7 64 24V DC Allen Bradley 294E FD1PS2 ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 0 5HP Allen Bradley 294E FD2P5Z ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 1HP Allen Bradley 294E FD4P22 ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 2HP Allen Bradley Safety H Specialty _ By Category By Vendor Favorites Cancel 4 The General page is displayed Enter a descriptive name for the ArmorStart LT E o Dereal Type 294E FD4P2Z ArmorStart LT VFD 480V AC 2HP Connection Module Info Vendor Allen Bradley Motor Protection amp Control P
207. native sets of requirements The first is found in 7 2 10 4 2 the second in 7 2 10 4 3 The requirements of 7 2 10 4 3 are similar to those in 430 53 C of NFPA 70 while the requirements of 7 2 10 4 2 are found only in NFPA 79 This appendix explains the requirements of 7 2 10 4 2 rather than those of 7 2 10 4 3 because this is the simpler method to use when applying the ArmorStart LT family of motor controllers The user must determine the requirements NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 to use for the application When making this determination it is necessary to understand the ArmorStart LT product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of industrial machinery The section of this appendix ArmorStart LT Product Family specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation according to NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 or both The definition of industrial Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 179 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery ArmorStart LT Product Family 180 machinery is found in 3 3 56 of NFPA 79 and 670 2 of Article 670 Industrial Machinery in NFPA 70 These conventions are used throughout this appendix First although all of the equipment is connected to a three phase electrical supply all of the figures are shown as one line diagrams Second although all of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers ar
208. nd motor run jog commands are received over a CIP I O connection in the established state I O networked control mode is chosen when DeviceLogix is disabled or when DeviceLogix is enabled and no user outputs or run commands are being driven in the DeviceLogix program Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 229 AppendixC Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix Programming 230 DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer Keep in mind that the application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND OR NOT timers counters latches and analog values Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I O The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware Hardware I O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the ArmotStart LT Refer to Table 36 for complete list of DeviceLogix I O functions There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality but some of the most common are listed below e Increased system reliability e Fast update times 1 2 ms possible e Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting e Operation independent of PLC or Network status e Continue
209. nect xA Controller KA vA Control power output is determined by disconnect status 24VDC Class 2 External 24VDC Power Supply Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 27 Chapter1 Product Overview Figure 7 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Multiple External Power Supplies A SE e ai ArmorStart LT Switched Control Power off Unswitched Control Power Disconnect Motor Controller e Class 2 O External Switched 24vDC 24VDC Power Supply a po Class 2 External Unswitched 2N 24VDC Power Supply E Figure 8 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Internal Power Supply optional A ArmorStart LT N OR G gt Internal Power IRB Supply Disconnect Control power output is determined by disconnect status Motor Controller Control power output is determined by disconnect status 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 Motor Circuit The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers are rated to operate the following types of three phase squirrel cage induction motors Bulletin 290E 291E 0 5 Hp 0 37 kW to 5 Hp 3 kW 480 277V AC Bulletin 294E 0 5 Hp 0 37
210. ng common services are implemented for the Overload Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Device Level Ring DLR CLASS CODE 0x0047 Object The following class attribute will be supported for the DLR Object A single instance instance 1 will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 Linear 1 Ring 0 Normal 1 Ring Fault 2 Get Network Status USINT 2 Unexpected Loop Detect 3 Partial Network Fault 4 Rapid Fault Restore Cycle Struct of 10 Get Active Supervisor Address ont Ring Supervisor Array of 6 9 USINT 12 Get Capability Flags DWORD 0x00000002 The following common services will be implemented for the DLR Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single Extended Device Object CLASS CODE 0x0064 The following class attributes will be supported for the Extended Device Object Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 217 AppendixB CIP Information A single instance instance 1 will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Set Name STRING User Assigned Name Defaults to a null 32 chars max 2 Set Description STRING User Assigned Description Defaults
211. ngLevel 73 198 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E 291E Starters Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance 36 72 StallEnableTime 74 37 74 StallTripLevel 75 38 76 ULInhibitTime 76 39 78 ULTripDelay 77 40 80 ULTripLevel 78 41 82 ULWarnLevel 79 Instance 101 Instance 101 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E units Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance 0 0 AssemblyRevision N A 1 2 AssemblyRevision N A 2 4 MotorNPVolts 28 3 6 MotorNPHertz 29 4 8 MotorOLCurrent 30 5 10 CurrentLimit 31 6 12 StopMode 32 7 14 SpeedReference 33 8 16 MinimumFreq 34 9 18 MaximumFreq 35 10 20 AccelTime1 36 11 22 DecelTime1 37 12 24 SCurvePercent 38 13 26 JogFrequency 39 14 28 JogAccelDecel 40 15 30 ProtFltResetMode 4 16 32 ProtectFltEnable 42 17 34 WarningEnable 43 18 36 RunNetFltAction 45 19 38 RunNetFaultValue 46 20 40 RunNetldleAction 47 21 42 RunNetldleValue 48 22 44 lOPointConfigure 49 23 46 FilterOffOn 50 24 48 FilterOnOff 51 25 50 OutProtFitState 52 26 52 OutProtFitValue 53 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 199 Appendix B 200 CIP Information Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters
212. nings OverloadWarning OverloadWarning OverloadWarning UnderPowerWarn UnderPowerWarn UnderPowerWarn PhaselmbalWarn PhaselmbalWarn JamWarning JamWarning UnderLoadWarn UnderLoadWarn UnswitchedPwrWarn UnswitchedPwrWarn UnswitchedPwrWarn Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Element Type Misc Data Bulletin 290E TripPresent Bulletin 291E TripPresent Using DeviceLogix Appendix C Bulletin 294E TripPresent WarningPresent WarningPresent WarningPresent RunningForward RunningForward RunningForward RunningReverse RunningReverse RunningReverse Ready Ready Ready NetControlStatus NetControlStatus NetControlStatus NetRefStatus CurrentFlowing CurrentFlowing AtReference KeyPadAuto KeyPadAuto KeyPadAuto KeyPadOff KeyPadOff KeyPadOff KeyPadHand KeyPadHand KeyPadHand KeyPadJogging DisconnectStatus DisconnectStatus DisconnectStatus BrakeStatus ExplicitCnxn ExplicitCnxn ExplicitCnxn l0Connection l0Connection l0Connection ExplicitCnxnFault ExplicitCnxnFault ExplicitCnxnFault 10CnxnFault 10CnxnFault 10CnxnFault 10Cnxnidle 10Cnxnidle 10Cnxnidle DLREnabled DLREnabled DLREnabled DLRFault DLRFault DLRFault Analog Input Point NetInputFreq Analog Output Point CommandFreq Misc Analog Input Data PhaseL1Current PhaseL1Current OutputFreq PhaseL2Current PhaseL2Current OutputCurrent
213. nits with Integrated Power Supply 14 Under Power Trip Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only 15 Sensor Short Flags a miswired hardware input point 16 Output Short Flags a miswired hardware output point 17 Fault 17 18 Heatsink Temp The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value 8 19 HW Over Current The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit 12 20 SW OverCurrent Programmed parameter 83 SW Current Trip has been exceeded 63 21 Aux Power Loss Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply 22 Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost 71 23 Drive Comm Loss The RS485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating 81 24 Power Loss Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85 of nominal bus voltage 3 25 Under Voltage DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value 4 26 Over Voltage DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value 5 27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable 28 Param Sync The drive and Main Control Board EEPROMS are not in sync 29 Drive EEPROM The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed 100 30 Hardware Fault This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable 31 Fan RMP The internal cooling fan is not running properly 32 Power Unit A major failure has been detected in the drive power section 70 33 Driv
214. nnector M12 D code female with Ethernet keying 4 Pin Ethernet Cable Category 5e Shielded or unshielded IP Configuration Static DHCP or BootP EtherNet IP DHCP Timeout 30s Data Transported over both TCP and UDP Packet Rate pps a E Consume Instance Command Default of 3 words Instance 150 Produce Instance Status Default of 14 words Instance 152 Message Support Unicast or Multicast Address Conflict Detection ACD IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet IP devices Sockets 150 maximum Security Login and password configurable E mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Web Server Webpage Features Status diagnostics configuration Concurrent Sessions 20 Web Server HTTP 1 1 Concurrent TCP Connections Maximum of 15 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections Exclusive owner data or Maximum 1 0 Connections CIP Class 1 listen only One connection per PLC Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established Network Connections Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages CIP Class 3 6 Class 1 Connection API 2 3200 ms Class 3 Connection API 100 10 000 ms Request Packet Interval RPI 20 ms default 2 ms minimum Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 169 Chapter6 Specifications Motor Overload Trip Curves Class 10 Approximate Trip Time s 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Full Load Current Class
215. nput Amps Output Amps 400V AC 50 Hz 480V AC 60 Hz peated 294_ FDIP5 0 5 0 37 2 0 18 15 294_ FD2P5 1 0 0 75 3 7 3 0 2 5 294_ FD4P2 2 0 1 5 6 5 5 5 3 6 Solid state PT type 150 for 60 s or 200 for 3 s Overload Protection Trip Class Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response and power down overload retention function Overcurrent Protection 200 hardware limit 300 instantaneous fault Overvoltage Category Ill Reset Mode Automatic or manual Output Frequency 0 400 Hz programmable Power Circuit Efficiency 97 5 typical Overvoltage 380 480V AC Input Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage equivalent to 575V AC incoming line Undervoltage 380 480V AC Input Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage equivalent to 275V AC incoming line Control Ride Through Minimum ride through is 0 5 s typical value is 2 s Faultless Power Ride Through 10 ms Carrier Frequency 2 10 kHz drive rating based on 4 kHz bah TE 2 of base speed across a 40 1 speed range Acceleration Deceleration Two independently programmable acceleration and deceleration times Each time may be programmed from 0 600 s in 0 1 s increments Maximum Motor Cable Lengths Reflected 10 m 32 ft CE application Wave Protection 14m 45 9 ft non CE application Source Brake EM Brake Current Maximum load current of 3 A The reflected wave data applies to all frequencies 2 10 kHz For CE compliant installations refer to the recommended EMI RFI cord gri
216. ns Appplying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery CIP Information 14 Bulletin 2940 ete A tla Mata deed Pa et rene 124 Dasic Stat s Groupe rren ne a SEE E E oala 124 Trip Status Groups e yan hue e A a a a e o Ei 129 Motor and Control Group ssssssssssrssresrrsrrerrereree 133 Speed Control Group ssssssserssreereeerrrreerrrsrrrer 135 Starter Protection Group sce sistance re hp ep yee as 138 User I O Configuration Group iwi ci0sk cece sete ea ncaaeis 140 Miscellaneous Configuration Group 6 ssc eee eee ea ee 145 Advanced Conhigurationict yh ass seecckeye mses nani 146 Chapter 5 Overview cei nag flit i netted as ei ener tase 157 Statas 2 Ds ana Resets ws t eiten astir AEE E aaah 157 Fault Diagnostics 4 oe va e e e a E a a RS 158 Protection Faults chore hd tear tec a t a A Ea 158 Quick Reference Troubleshooting ssessrseserererrrrrrrere 160 Fault LED Indications n nn nasa chieii te viveny saree es 161 Bulletin 290E 291 Faults s scseng stage he Bo sielnontawe arny ages 161 B lletin 294E Faults o4 vistas dia gae saa aan eaeeaa 163 Chapter 6 Bullet 29Q0F PVE Go cam en pee wie etd E E a E eet het g 165 Motor Overload Trip Curves icant eas cai et eee ts 170 Bulletin 100 K 104 K Life Load Curves 2 ce eee eee ence nes 171 Billet DOA sc ok cht tate lel 0 cited OLN a hte adh od 172 Motor Overload Trip C utvesew sates rade ety
217. nt Default Value 0 0 Disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 151 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters AutoRstrtTries Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive Parameter Number 84 Related Parameter 85 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 0 1 Set Parameter 84 AutoRestartTries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 85 AutoRestartDelay to a value other than 0 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrImp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set Parameter 84 AutoRestartTries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 85 AutoRestartDelay to 0 A standards regulations or industry guidelines 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes AutoRstrtDelay Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 84 Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value other than zero BoostSelect Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 28 MotorNPVolts and redefines the Volts per Hz curve See
218. ntage of Full Load Amps Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 69 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units TCU Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 85 Parameter Number 70 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units secs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 250 Default Value 10 Parameter Number 71 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group Advanced Config Units X X SECS Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 25 0 Default Value 5 0 Parameter Number 72 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Config Units FLA Minimum Value 50 Maximum Value 600 Default Value 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 121 Chapter 4 122 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters JamWarningLevel This parameter determines the Jam Warning Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps StallEnabledTime This parameter determines the time that stall detection is enabled during motor starting StallTripLevel This parameter determines the Stall Trip Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps ULInhibitTime This parameter determines the time during motor starting that Underload detection is inhibited Parameter Number 73 Access Rule GET
219. ntrolStatus Parameter Number 10 The parameter provides the DeviceLogix Access Rule GET Control Status Data Type UINT 0 Controlled in Logix programs Group Pe 1 Controlled in local DLX programs Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OXFF Default Value 0 Bit Function 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 X RunForward X RunReverse Out00 X Out01 X Out02 X Out03 X Out04 X Out05 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 OutputSourceV IPS SwitchedVolts This parameter determines the incoming switched control voltage across terminals A1 A2 IPS Available voltage on User Output Pin 4 for all 1 0 points UnswitchedVolts This parameter determines the incoming unswitched control voltage across terminals A2 A3 IPS Available voltage on Input Sensor Source Pin 1 for all 1 0 points Trip Status Group TripStatus This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip Parameter Number 11 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x xx Volts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 SensorSourceV IPS Paameternumber n Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x xx Volts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Parameter N
220. o CIP connections are Check to make sure the product is properly wired established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out and configured on the network Flashing Red Connection has timed out Check to make sure the PLC is operating correctly and that there are no media cabling issues Check to see if other network devices are in a similar state Solid Red Duplicate IP address detected Check for node address conflict and resolve Flashes The device has not completed the initialization is not on an bah Green Red active network or has not finished self test at power up Remove or change the IP address of the conflicting device LS1 and LS2 Port Activity Status Off No link established Verify network connection Green Link established at 100 Mbps No action Flashing Green Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps No action Yellow Link established at 10 Mbps No action 160 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Status LED Flashing Yellow Diagnostics Chapter 5 Table 26 LED Status Indication Description Recommended Action Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps No action 1 0 Status Indicators Off Fault LED Indications The user has plugged into the 1 0 but the indicator did not illuminate once initiated Verify the wiring of Input or Output is correct When used as an output point ensure the corresponding bit in param
221. omes the explicit control connection when it becomes the first EtherNet IP Class 3 explicit connection to send a set service to one of the following e The value attribute of any Discrete Output Point DOP instance Class Code 0x09 e The data attribute of any output consumed Assembly instance Class Code 0x04 e Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object Class Code 0x29 EDS Files The information contained in the EDS Electronic Data Sheet files for ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP can be extracted via the network The following CIP objects will be covered in the following subsections For convenience all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet IP port are included Class Object 0x0001 Identity Object 0x0002 Message Router 0x0004 Assembly Object 0x0006 Connection Manager Object 0x0008 Discrete Input Point Object 0x0009 Discrete Output Point Object 0x000A Analog Input Point 0x000B Analog Output Point 0x000F Parameter Object 0x0010 Parameter Group Object 0x001D Discrete Input Group Object 0x001E Discrete Output Group Object 0x0029 Control Supervisor 0x002C Overload Object 0x0047 Device Level Ring Object 0x0097 DPI Fault Object 0x098 Alarm Object Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Class Object 0x00F5 TCP IP Interface Object 0x00F6 Ethernet Link Object 0x0376 Trip an
222. on Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Trademark List Allen Bradley ArmorConnect ArmorStart LT ControlLogix CompactLogix PowerFlex RSLinx StepLogic DeviceLogix On Machine RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 are tradem
223. on the front of the ECM When the IP address switches are valid the subnet mask will be Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 255 255 255 0 and the gateway address is set to 0 0 0 0 A power cycle is required for any new IP address to take effect when the switches are used must be assigned a fixed IP address If a DHCP server is used it must i ATTENTION To avoid unintended operation the ArmorStart LT be configured to assign a fixed IP address for ArmorStart LT Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control Figure 40 Network Address Example This example shows the IP address set to 000 DHCP x100 xio x1 Static Address Alternative If the manual address configuration of 192 168 1 xxx is not acceptable a static address can be configured using the embedded web page First configure the switches to a valid address to access the web page Using a common web browser enter the address 192 168 1 __ _ switches From the Administrative Settings window select Network Configuration Change the Ethernet Interface Configuration to Static and enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway and apply Change the ArmorStart LT address switches to 999 The unit will now accept the new IP address To access the web page you will need to use the new address in the web browser The
224. ons CIP Class 1 listen only One connection per PLC Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established Network Connections Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages CIP Class 3 6 Class 1 Connection API 2 3200 ms Class 3 Connection API 100 10 000 ms Request Packet Interval RPI 20 ms default 2 ms minimum Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 177 Chapter6 Specifications Motor Overload Trip Curves Motor overload current parameter provides class 10 overload protection Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload S No Derate e Min Derate S Max Derate 4100 100 100 80 80 E 80 Oo QI O g 60 g 60 g 60 2 2 2 S 40 S 40 S 40 ro 5 20 5 20 5 20 O O oO 0 0 0 E 0 25 50 75 100125 150 175200 S 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 R 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 of Motor Nameplate Hertz P29 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Introduction Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Each ArmorStart LT motor controller is listed for group installation This appendix explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart LT motor controllers in multiple motor branch circuits according to 7 2 10 4 1 and 7 2 10 4 2 of NFPA 79 Electrical Standard
225. or Keypads sta eccse iano hatcuana tenga eehs 35 Keypad tecal Controluntic c 23 sozawouren as aedgeeeesss tamer ees 35 Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 290E 291E only 35 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 11 Table of Contents Installation and Wiring 12 Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function Bulletin 294E only 2 eee eeee seen ees Keypad Local Control Wxiaiecece ionen so sata ee Wesel Keypad and HOA Disable Parameter 503 2 ioe fats teas pase ts Source Brake Contactor and Connector Bulletin 294E only Chapter 2 SLOG apes sane E acai a een aad oda Oca maaan Installation Precautions aie sctie es AiG ta AG a at Precautions for Bulletin 290E 291E Applications 06 Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications 00 cee e eee DIMENSIONS 5s x2 ceagsdete EE E ROS ON ee CEE EES Bulletin 2908 29 Wires iat as OSs cea aire vee dates oe 8 Baraat Behr OAT oo aes E E EE NEE ArmorStart LT Gland Plate Matrix cccceececuesceees Connection Locations 0 c ccc cece ence een eet enn neenees Internal Power Control and Ground Locations 5 Gland Connections dis dea coed peM eed Vitel hr ae ee ol Wiring Terminal Detatlicas tase iaasees aso seeedeeanwava so eae Branch Circuit 2 eObet ti OTncscee stare tio pat ote cari oewseasp ice awe mtaiod make oeiebeiredta Simple System Designs 6 diwricotrriscd ck diawewando
226. or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Connections Two Class 1 connections for I O transfer will be supported and six Class 3 explicit connections will be supported The Class 1 connections are e Data e Listen Only Only one Data connection is allowed A maximum of two Listen Only connections are supported shared with the Data connection This connection type is dependent on another connection to exist If that connection Data is closed the listen only connection shall be closed as well The connection sizes are ArmorStart Connection Type Connection Size in bytes Input 16 Bulletin290E 291E Output 3 Input 18 Bulletin 294E Output 6 Configured by The ArmorStart LT may be configured via the ArmorStart LT s web page or RS Logix 5000 Often times customers utilize the web interface to configure the unit before it is ever connected to the PLC The AOP will require the user to specify how the ArmorStart LT is configured once added to RS Logix 5000 The valid options are e Web Page The unit is configured by the ArmorStart LT s web pages The AOP will NOT display any page or content of a page that allows configuration of the unit In th
227. or starting solution designed for use in material handling applications ArmorStart LT is the latest addition to the ArmorStart portfolio ArmorStart LT is a leader in the market place given its compact size and high performance features in network I O and motor control This manual will guide you through the features and functionality when installing the product Thank you for choosing ArmorStart LT for your distributed motor control needs If you have any questions please refer to the Support Section for contact information 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Table of Contents Important User latormiation ie52 20 4 cece eesti steeds 2 General PReCMitONSrataa ch tu tand pha S ae Se 25st Me de Boe Oe Rsk 3 Software Requirements ccanenrsrcecosdt ines EEEE RE 4 INACiTIOtalRESOUECES Ws aire laly pa Bi sealers Gel cael shee Mod ou ke 4 Rockwell Automation Support 2 0 542 36 66 064 hoe ee ee 5 Installation Assistance sia cx alist a desde ante ded ea ate tote idea oes 5 New Product Satisfaction Return cccccececccceeeevesececens 6 Summary of Changes New and Updated Intorination 2 24 2 20 sei een ee 7 Preface European Communities EC Directive Compliance 9 Low Voltage and EMC Directives sic scsisiestoadenebraetsaadaw vies 9 JENO T Ato ass iis con caeeaass topo aenane Ae tan ase eae te Ae eh ae 10 Chapter 1 Descriptions cse Aigo pth E Seas OSE ee Kea 17 Features AEE
228. orque across the entire speed range of the drive and improved speed regulation as loading increases Open Loop Speed Regulation with Slip Compensation allows the VFD to automatically adjust the output frequency to compensate for speed changes due to motor loading This feature utilizes an open loop current feedback slip compensation circuit Slip Compensation works as an open loop speed regulator that increases the output frequency of the drive as the load is increased or decreases the frequency as the load drops This feature is used where the motor must run at a relatively constant speed regardless of torque output of speed 100 With Slip S Compensation 99 S ee 98 oO gt 5 Without Slip Compensation 97 96 95 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of load Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 31 Chapter1 Product Overview Status LEDs and Reset Figure 12 Status Diagnostic LEDs and Reset LS1 LS2 MS PWR NS RUN FLT ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually marked LEDs shown in Figure 12 located on the ECM module In addition a local reset is provide for clearing of faults Table 5 details the diagnostic and status LEDs Table 5 ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators Indicator Description Color_1 Color_2 PWR LED The bicolor green yellow LED shows the Solid green is illuminated when switched Solid yellow is illuminat
229. ose that have been evaluated for use as branch circuit protection devices This means that semiconductor fuses used to protect power electronic equipment or supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple motor branch circuit Supplementary Note 3 There are four complementary ratings relevant to the specified maximum branch circuit protection of 7 2 10 4 1 They are the fuse class the maximum fuse rating the voltage rating and connection of the source 480Y 277 V and the available fault current of the source Applying the controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all the controllers and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers will not result in a shock or fire hazard Supplementary Note 4 In this example the assumption is made that the available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side of the fuses Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers this reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller the horsepower Bulletin 294 controller is very close to the fuses 4 Requirement Four Overload Protection The motors conductors and controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions Text 7 3 1 General Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor motor controller and branch circuit conductor against exc
230. ours Elapse run hours Parameter 14 DriveTemperature VFD internal temperature Parameter 15 TripStatus Bit enumerate trip status Parameter 16 WarningStatus Bit enumerate warning status Parameter 17 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 91 Chapter 3 Table 16 Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 290E 291E Product Commissioning Instance 150 Starter Cmd DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290 291 Starters Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 ResetFault RunReverse RunForward 1 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 2 Pt07Deviceln Pt06Deviceln Pt05Deviceln Pt04Deviceln Pt03Deviceln Pt02Deviceln Pt01Deviceln Pt00Deviceln 3 Pt15Deviceln Pt14Deviceln Pt13Deviceln Pt12Deviceln Pt11Deviceln Pt10Deviceln Pt09Deviceln Pt08Deviceln 4 AnalogDeviceln low byte 5 AnalogDeviceln high byte Table 17 Bulletin 290E 291E Consume Assembly Command Tags Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style DEMO_REV RunForward DEMO_REV 0 RunForward BOOL Decima DEMO_REV RunReverse DEMO_REV 0 RunReverse BOOL Decima DEMO_REV ResetFault DEMO_REV 0 ResetFault BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt00Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt00Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt01Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt01Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt02Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt02Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt03Data DEMO_REV 0 Pt03Data BOOL
231. outines Parameter 68 3 Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required 163 Chapter5 Diagnostics Table 29 Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E Blink Auto Reset Bulletin 294E Pattern Capable Disable Default Trip Status Description Action 7 Yes No On Parameter Sync PF This fault is generated during the 1 The most common cause of this fault is that the 4M Codes 48 71 parameter synchronization procedure disconnect has been opened or that power has and 81 between the Control Module and the been removed from the drive To clear the fault internal drive when the syncing process repower the drive and activate a reset fails resulting in the drive configuration 2 The drive may have been commanded to default not matching the Control Module values Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive configuration 8 Drive No On DCBusOrDiscnnct This fault is a result of the drive s Power 1 The most common cause of this fault is that the Controlled PF 4M Codes 3 4 Loss PF 4M Code 3 UnderVoltage PF 4M disconnect has been opened or that power has and 5 Code 4 and OverVoltage PF 4M Code 5 been removed from the drive To Clear the fault faults When an Undervoltage occurs repower the drive and activate a reset because the Disconnect has been opened 2 Monitor the incoming line for phase loss or line the condition will be diagnosed as an imbalance low voltage or line power interruption Open Disconnect tr
232. p Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 10 0 Parameter Number 40 Related Parameters 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Drive Advanced Setup Units X X SECS Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 10 0 137 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Chapter4 Bulletin 290 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Starter Protection Group ProtFiltResetMode Parameter Number 41 This parameter configures the Protection Access Rule GET SET Fault reset mode Data Type BOOL O Manal Group Starter Protection 1 Automatic Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 ProtectFitEnable Parameter Number 42 This parameter enables the Protection Access Rule Gist Fault by setting the bit to 1 Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxFFFF Default Value OxBFFF Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 4 3 0 X OverloadTrip PhaseShortIrip UnderPowerTrip X SensorShortTrip X OverCurrentTrip X NonVolMemoryTrip X ParamSyncTrip X DCBusTrip OpenDisconnect X StallTrip X OverTemperature X GroundFault X RestartRetries X DriveHdwFault X OutputShortTrip X UserDefinedTrip X HardwareFltTrip The functions highlighted are enabled by default
233. p accessory For availability of the quick disconnect three phase shielded power and motor cable contact your local sales representative for details 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Specifications Chapter 6 Electrical Ratings Power Supply NEC Class 2 Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC 10 20 Overvoltage Protection Reverse polarity protected Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 150 mA Power 3 6W en Input Current each 50 mA Maximum Current 450 mA Maximum Power 14 4W Peak Inrush lt 5 A for 35 ms Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 125mA Control Circuit External Source Switched Power Supply Out Requirements put Current each 500 mA Maximum Current 1 625 A Maximum Power 42W Peak Inrush lt 5 A for 35 ms Voltage 19 2 26 4V DC Nominal Current 275 mA Power 6 6 W Switched and Unswitched Number of Inputs x 50 mA user defined Power Supply Requirements Number of Outputs x 500 mA user defined Maximum Current 275 mA user defined Maximum Power 6 6 W 24 x user defined 60 W max Peak Inrush lt 10 A for 35 ms ENEE A An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input outputs and logic control Cat No Sym Amps RMS Circuit Breaker Fuse 294_ G1 or 63 10 kA 480V 277 rane 294_ G1 or 63 5 kA 480Y 277 ee Short Circuit Current Rating
234. pairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications A ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Software Requirements The table lists the versions of software that are required Software Version RSLinx Classic 2 56 or later RSLogix 5000 17 01 or later Download the most current version of the Add On Profile from http www rockwellautomation com support downloads html BOOTP DHCP Version 2 3 or later Additional Resources These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper
235. put per Connection T each Overcurrent Protection 1 5 A the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value Output Input ON to OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signa Rated Insulation Voltage U UL 1500V AC IEC 2000V AC Rated Operating Voltage U 19 2 26 4V DC Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC Nominal Operating Current 500 mA per point Maximum Thermal Current hre 500 mA per point Maximum Off state Leakage Current 1pA Maximum Number of Outputs 6 Surge Suppression to recognition by the module If an output exceeds 1 5 A for greater than 7 ms a fault is generated Integrated diode to protect against switching loads 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Operating Temperature Range Specifications Environmental Ratings 20 40 C 4 104 F Chapter 6 50 C 122 F without derating when properly rated line reactors are installed in branch circuit Storage and Transportation 25 85 C 13 185 F Temperature Range Altitude 1000 m Humidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings IP66 UL Type 4 12 Approximate Shipping Weight 7 3 kg 16 Ib P66 UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1 3 IP66 UL Type 4 12 available with G1 and G3 gland option Mechanical Ratings Operational 30 G
236. r_1 02 001 zip from pport E x a artLt_Rel_Ver_1 02 001 zip from pport rockwellautomation com Estimated time left 29 min 40 sec 561KB of 38 7MB copied Download to Ci RAZ90ArmorStartLt_Rel_Ver_1 02 001 zip Transfer rate 22 9KB Sec Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Using DeviceLogix 7 Upon the completion of downloading unzip the files to the folder 8 Run the MPSetup exe from the folder and start installation yinstaliNotes License me autorun inf 1KB me MPSetup exe 1 003 KB Description Component of MPSetup Company Rockwell Automation Inc File Version 7 0 2170 0 Date Created 12 07 2011 8 11 PM d MPSetupFRA Size 0 97 MB S MPSetupITA dil 141 ke MPSetupJPN dll 141 KB 3 MPSetupKOR dll 141 KB S MPSetupPTB dil 141 KB 3 shfolder dll 22 KB 9 The following dialog box will appear RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup File Folder File Folder File Folder Setup Information Application Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Application Extension Please wait while Setup evaluates and prepares your workstation for RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Initializing 17 04 2012 3 01 PM 17 04 2012 3 01 PM 17 04 2012 3 01 PM 09 08 2010 8 11 PM 10
237. ransfer Protocol SMTP Once properly configured the motor controller will e mail the user with specific fault trip messages Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 21 Chapter1 Product Overview Factory Installed Options 22 Internal power supply IPS ArmorStart LT offers the user an optional 24V DC internal power supply The internal power supply provides all control and I O power needs and is sourced from the incoming 3 phase power This eliminates the need to run separate control power to each unit reducing installation time and cost The local at motor disconnect will remove power from the motor terminals and outputs when in the OFF condition Hand Off Auto HOA keypad ArmorStart LT offers an optional local Hand Off Auto keypad This key pad allows local start stop motor control regardless of PLC status This option can be used for troubleshooting or maintenance operations The HOA can also be disabled when local control is not allowed using parameter 67 Source brake ArmorStart LT provides an optional internally controlled electromechanical motor brake contactor The motor brake power is sourced from 3 phase power L1 and L2 Quick disconnect gland ArmorStart LT offers a plug n play solution that simplifies wiring and installation These factory installed quick disconnect receptacles provide connectivity to ArmorConnect media for three phase control and motor connections The cables
238. ration tools such as RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP and data servers such as RSLinx Classic EDS files for all ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP devices can be uploaded directly from the device via the web server interface Rockwell Automation product EDS files are also available on the internet at http www ab com networks eds Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 33 Chapter1 Product Overview Fault Diagnostics 34 Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick re starting Protection Faults Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected Protection faults are also known as trips or faults These faults will be reported in multiple formats including e Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter 16 in DeviceLogix e Inthe ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart EtherNet IP version e Asasequence of LED flashes on the ECM Table 6 Protection Faults LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E 291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits 1 0 OverloadTrip OverloadTrip 2 1 PhaseLossTrip PhaseLShortTrip 3 2 UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip 4 3 SensorShortTrip SensorShortTrip 5 4 PhaselmbalTrip OverCurrentTrip 6 5 NonVolMemoryTrip NonVolMemo
239. re lost you will need to reset the device to the factory defaults which results in losing its configuration Figure 47 Internal Web Browser Allen Bradley Wano eaP ake nsonsation Expand __ Minimize F Home Parameters al Diagnostics Ca Administrative Setting D ens File Device Name Device Description Device Location Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Product Revisions ArmorStart 294E 0 5 HP Ethernet IP Switch PowerFlex 4M 3P 460V 50HP Serial Number Status Uptime ArmorStart 294E 0 5 HP 00 00 BC C1 90 45 192 168 1 8 1 001 Build 38 1 060 2 001 78563412 No I O Connections established 0d 00h 01m 16s Resources Visit AB com for additional information Contacts Seconds Between Refresh 15 Disable Refresh with 0 Copyright 2011 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved From here you are able to view parameter settings device status and diagnostics from multiple tab views 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Network Configuration To access the network configuration you will be prompted to login to the Administrative Setting Figure 48 Enter Network Password P This secure Web Site at 192 168 111 requires you to log on v ea Please type the User Name and Password that you use for ArmovStart 281E 0 5 2 54 24VDC UserName Administatod z Password
240. reight agent The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment Remove all packing material wedges or braces from within and around the ArmorStart LT distributed motor controller and other device s Check the contents of the package to see if all contents are included Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if any items are missing IMPORTANT Before the installation and start up of the drive a general inspection of mechanical integrity i e loose parts wires connections packing materials etc must be made After unpacking check nameplate catalog number s of the item s against the purchase order See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system which will aid in nameplate interpretation The controller should remain in the shipping container prior to installation If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage e Store in a clean dry location e Store within an ambient temperature range of 25 85 C 13 185 F e Store within a relative humidity range of 0 95 noncondensing e Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere e Donot store equipment in a construction area Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 39 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring
241. rent rating Referring to Figure 62 the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input current of 3 0 amperes Using the rated input current the conductors from the combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125 of 3 0 A or 3 75 A The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125 of 2 1 A or 2 6 A The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is given by 12 5 4 When the combined load conductors supply one or more Bulletin 294E controllers the minimum ampacity calculation of 12 5 4 must be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers for the full load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply In Figure 62 the currents I1 12 I3 I4 and I5 are the input currents to each controller I3 and I4 are the full load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors I1 I2 and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers Referring to the explanatory text c in Figure 62 the method for calculating the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors follows first multiply the largest input current to any controller Bulletin 290E 291E or 294E by 125 In this case the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers I3 and I4 are the largest 7 6 A Because they are the same either can be used Choose I3 to calculate 125 of the maximum 125 of 7 6 A is 9 5 A Second sum the remaining input currents I1 I2 I4 IS
242. rip delay time 8 Fault 8 9 Fault 9 10 Fault 10 11 Fault 11 12 Stall Trip Motor current above stall trip level during motor starting 13 Switched Power Indicates the loss of switched control power Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 219 Appendix B 220 CIP Information Table 33 Fault Codes Fault Text and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers Fault Code Fault Text Help Text 14 Under Power Trip Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only 15 Sensor Short Flags a miswired hardware input point 16 Output Short Flags a miswired hardware output point 17 Fault 17 18 Fault 18 19 Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalanced phase current 20 Fault 20 21 Aux Power Loss Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply 22 Fault 22 23 Fault 23 24 Fault 24 25 Fault 25 26 Fault 26 27 NonVol Memory This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable 28 Fault 28 29 Fault 29 30 Hardware Fault This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable 31 Fault 31 32 Fault 32 33 Fault 33 34 Fault 34 35 Fault 35 36 Fault 36 37 Fault 37 38 Fault 38 39
243. rk output status Pt13DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt14DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Pt15DeviceOu DeviceLogix network output status Int00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network analog output L1 Current Phase A current L2Current Phase B current L3Current Phase C current AvgCurrent Average phase A B and C current PercentTCU Overload percentage thermal utilization 100 overload trip SwitchedVoltageLevel Switched control power voltage Parameter 11 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Commissioning Chapter 3 Device Input Status Tags Tag Description Use UnswitchedVoltageLevel Unswitched control power voltage Parameter 12 TripStatus Bit enumerate trip status Parameter 16 WarningStatus Bit enumerate warning status Parameter 17 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 97 Chapter3 Product Commissioning Notes 98 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Electronic Data Sheet EDS Basic Setup Parameters Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters When a 3rd party PLC is used an embedded EDS file can be uploaded directly from the ArmorStart LT This allows device configuration through 3rd party tools EDS files are also available on the internet at http www ab com networks eds When the RSLogix AOP is not used Table 22 lists the minimum setup configurations required for Bulletin 290E 2
244. rning 10 11 Warning 11 12 Warning 12 13 Switched Pwr Warn 14 Under Power Warn 15 Warning 15 16 Warning 16 17 Warning 17 18 Warning 18 19 Warning 19 20 Warning 20 21 Aux Power Warn TCP IP Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00F5 Indicates auxiliary Power was has dipped below 19 Volts Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply The following class attributes will be supported One Instance of the TCP IP Interface Object will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Status DWORD 2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD 0x000000F4 3 Get Set Configuration Control DWORD 0 Configuration from NVS 2 Configuration from DHCP 4 Get Physical Link Object Struct of UINT 2 words Padded EPATH 20 F6 24 01 Enet Link Object Instance 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 223 Appendix B CIP Information Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 5 Get Set Interface Configuration Struct of UDINT IP Address UDINT Network Mask UDINT Gateway Address UDINT Primary DNS UDINT Secondary DNS STRING Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names 6 Get Set Host Name STRING 8 Get Set TTL Value USINT Time to Live value for EtherNet IP multicast packets 9 Get Set Multicast Config Structure of USINT Allocation Control USINT Reserved UINT Number of multicast addresses to allocate 1 4
245. ryTrip 7 6 reserved ParamSyncTrip 8 7 Jamtrip DCBusOrDiscnnct 9 8 StallTrip StallTrip 10 9 UnderloadTrip Overlemperature 11 10 reserved GroundFault 12 11 reserved RestartRetries 13 12 reserved DriveHdwFault 14 13 OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip 15 14 UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip 16 15 HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip Cannot be disabled Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Optional HOA Selector Keypad Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 290E 291E only Product Overview Chapter 1 Keypad Local Control The HOA Selector Keypad allows for local start stop jog control in forward reverse motor direction If two buttons are pressed simultaneously this action is ignored by the device unless one of the buttons is the OFF button If the OFF button is pressed at any time the unit will go to the off state When local Hand mode is entered speed reference is switched to Internal Frequency When in Auto mode the unit the speed reference is switched to the mode specified in parameter 33 SpeedReference HAND The Hand key will initiate starter operation The Auto key allows for Start Stop control via the communications AUTO network OFF If the starter is running pressing the OFF key will cause the starter to stop DIR Arrow The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor either forward or reverse When pressed JOG will be initiated if no ot
246. s Chapter 6 impedance must be low enough to ensure any short circuit or ground fault current that can flow through any assembly will be large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the Cat No 140U D63 C circuit breaker Refer to NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 or your local electrical code for guidance in coordinating over current protective devices and the circuit being protected f WARNING The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly s own Fusing Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes SCCR at 480 277 V AC maximum when protected by 40 A CC J and T class fuses refer to the Specifications Chapter 6 Electrical Wiring ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP utilizes 24V DC control power for communications and I O The control power terminal connections are labeled A1 A2 and A3 Switched power A1 will supply outputs and motor control Unswitched power A3 will supply logic power communications and sensor inputs IMPORTANT _ EtherNet IP is an unpowered network therefore if device status is important the A3 terminal must have an unswitched power source 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Installation and Wiring Figure 25 Bulletin 290E Full Voltage At Motor Disconnect DOL 4 Disconnect Status
247. s sinking 24V DC inputs The user has the option to select any point as a sourcing 24V DC output RSLogix 5000 Add On Profile AOP ArmorStart LT offers for Allen Bradley ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLCs a downloadable Add On Profile The AOP simplifies setup and commissioning via predefined tags and commissioning wizards The AOP also allows copy and paste functionality for quick setup and configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs IMPORTANT AOP support for EtherNet IP network only and requires RSLogix 5000 revision 17 01 or later There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20 0 Update RSLogix 5000 to 20 1 or greater DeviceLogix ArmorStart LT offers local programmable logic via DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone program that resides within the ArmorStart LT It is programmed locally using the Add On Profile and implements operations such as AND OR NOT Timers Counters Latches and Analog operations DeviceLogix can run as a stand alone application independent of the network or collaboratively with the PLC However unswitched control power must be maintained for DeviceLogix to operate Quick disconnect for I O and network ArmorStart LT offers quick disconnect connectors for I O and communications EtherNet IP node address ArmorStart LT offers external accessible address switches for device node address configuration The address can be set statically or dynamically EMI filter ArmorStart LT for VFD
248. se DEMO_REV I RunningReverse BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Ready DEMO_REV I Ready BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV CurrentFlowing DEMO_REV 1 CurrentFlowing BOOL Decimal Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 93 Chapter 3 Product Commissioning 94 Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style DEMO_REV DeviceLogixEnabled DEMO_REV I DeviceLogixEnabled BOOL Decima DEMO_REV KeypadAuto DEMO_REV I KeypadAuto BOOL Decima DEMO_REV KeypadOff DEMO_REV I KeypadOff BOOL Decima DEMO_REV KeypadHand DEMO_REV I KeypadHand BOOL Decima DEMO_REV DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV 1 DisconnectClosed BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt00Data DEMO_REV Pt00Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt01Data DEMO_REV Pt01Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt02Data DEMO_REV 1 Pt02Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt03Data DEMO_REV 1 Pt03Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt04Data DEMO_REV 1 Pt04Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt05Data DEMO_REV I Pt05Data BOOL Decima DEMO_REV Pt0ODeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt00DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt01DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt02DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt03DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt04DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV PtOSDeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt0SDeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV 1 Pt06DeviceOut BOOL Decimal DEMO_
249. shed at 10 Mbps MS Module Status The bicolor green red LED indicates the Flashing green indicates the device has not Flashing red indicates a resettable LED status of the module been configured protection fault exists or the node address Flashing bicolor red green indicates a Steady green indicates the device is switches have been changed without a self test on power up configured and operational power cycle and do not match the in use configuration Steady red indicates a non resettable protection fault exists 1 0 Status Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0 5and Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or Off when input is not valid or the output is Enunciators 0 5 indicate the status of the input output output is on not turned on LEDs connectors One LED for each 1 0 point Reset Button The blue reset button will cause a 32 protection fault reset to occur Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Product Overview Chapter 1 Electronic Data Sheet EDS ArmorStart LT EtherNet IP has an embedded electronic data sheet An EDS consists of specially formatted text files as defined by the CIP EDS files contain details about the readable and configurable parameters of the EtherNet IP device They also provide information about the I O connections that the device supports and the content of the associated data structures EDS are used by EtherNet IP device configu
250. should not be used for product selection not all combinations will produce a 26 valid catalog number 294 E F D1P5 Z G1 Option Option2 a b c d e g h a e Bulletin Number Control Voltage Code Description Code Description 294 VFD Starter Z External 24V DC control power P Internal power supply b Communications f Code Description Gland Plate Options E EtherNet IP Power and Motor D DeviceNet Code Description G1 Conduit entry G2 ArmorConnect G3 Gland kits c Enclosure Type Code Description F UL Type 4 12 g Option 1 Code Description 3 Hand Off Auto selector keypad with Jog function d Output Current Code Description D1P5 1 5 A 0 4 kW 0 5 Hp D2P5 2 5 A 0 75 kW 1 0Hp D4P2 3 6 A 1 5 kW 2 0Hp Option 2 Code Description SB Source Brake blank No option P66 UL Type 4 is available with all gland options UL Type 4 12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option See selection guide 290 SG001_ EN P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering Leave blank unless there is a customer specific option defined by the factory Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Basic Operation Product Overview Chapter 1 Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets The ArmorStart LT Distribu
251. ssion prescribed fault level This fault is generated component failure when current is greater than the Jam Trip 2 Check JamInhibitTime Parameter 70 Level for longer than the Jam Delay time JamtripDelay Parameter 71 and JamTripLevel after the Jam Inhibit time has expired Parameter 72 setting 9 No Yes Off Stall Trip During starting the motor did not reach 1 Check for source of stall for example excessive running speed within the prescribed load or mechanical transmission component period This fault is generated when the failure RMS current is greater than 2 Check StallEnabledTime Parameter 74 and StallTripLevel Parameter 75 or longer StallTripLevel Parameter 75 than StallEnbldTime Parameter 74 3 Check if FLASetting Parameter 28 is set correctly during motor starting 10 No Yes Off Underload Trip Underload protection is for undercurrent Check motor and mechanical system for broken shaft monitoring A trip occurs when the motor belts or gear box Check ULInhibitTime Parameter current drops below the trip level 76 ULTripDelay Parameter 77 ULTripLevel Parameter 78 and ULWarningLevel Parameter 79 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 No No On Output Short Trip This fault is generated when a hardware Correct isolate or remove wiring error prior to output short circuit condition is detected restarting the system 15 Yes Yes Off Us
252. t of parameters and a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Parameters 41 68 are common to all ArmorStart LTs IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the parameter listing These changes maybe immediate even during the running status Bulletin 290E 291E Basic Status Group PhaseL1Current This parameter determines the actual Phase L1 current PhaseL2Current This parameter determines the actual Phase L2 current Parameter Number 1 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Basic Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Basic Status Units X xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 PhaseL3Current This parameter determines the actual Phase L3 current AverageCurrent This parameter determines the average of 3 Phase currents ThermalUtilized This parameter determines the percent of Thermal Capacity used StarterStatus This parameter provides the status of the starter Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 3 Access Rule GET Data Type INT Group Basic Status Units x xx Amps Min
253. t the controller can supply In UL 508C this is taken to be 400 percent of the rated output current of the controller or 6 amperes Referring to the controller on the right UL 508C permits the group installation testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect a multiple motor branch circuit According to both NFPA 70 430 53 C and NFPA 79 7 2 10 4 3 this is 250 amperes This value derived from the installation requirements of 430 53 C and 430 53 D of NFPA 70 is determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT controller can accept 10 AWG Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes This covers 7 2 10 4 2 which permits only 100 amperes However in this case the manufacturer Rockwell Automation chose to test and mark with the lower value of 45 amperes This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number and type of controllers in the branch circuit limited by the maximum fuse rating and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each controller Therefore to make its use in the multiple motor branch circuit of Figure 58 practical the horsepower Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating of 45 amperes rather than just 6 amperes 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B
254. t to select Logix The speed of the motor will be control by the controller tag in the Contrologix Configure the Acceleration Deceleration and Jog Frequency here General Speed Control Connection Modue Info Speed a Motor Protection amp Control paro a loo Seed Corha Sped mts tame Rlfisraaneny Cree User 1 0 zS Rane peny Adv Fault Configuration Status Faulk Status Max Frequency Internet Protocol a n eee Port Configuration He Netwoek Min Frequency 0 0 ih 7 t l Accoller ation H 1 Deceleration Acodi 10 0 s Deceli 10 0 s Jog Frequency Frequency 10 0 He AccelDecel 10 0 s 12 Then proceed to the Fault Configuration and configure the reset mode to Automatic or Manual Then click OK to proceed General Connection Module Info Motor Protection amp Control taor aaa Fauk Reset Mode Marwai v Net Faut Mode RENEE aaa Program Mode off v Fouk Status Irtemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Fault Configuration Starter Fault Actions Fault Enable User Trip Csoftware Current Trip a Warning Enable C Switched Power Loss C Drive Parameter Initialization lunswikched Power Loss C Configuration 13 Download the configuration to the controller To download select Communication gt Who Active f RSLogix 5000 Armorstart_LT_Test 1756 163 1 File Edit view Search Logic Tools Win peu Ss y m Communications Select Recent Path Offline D MRUN co On
255. t05Function This parameter determines the special function for User Input 5 0 NoFunction 1 FaultReset 2 MotionDisable 3 ForceSnapShot 4 UserFault 5 BrakeRelease These choices are level sensitive All others are edge sensitive Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Group NetworkOverride This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault 0 Disable 1 Enable Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 63 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group User 1 0 Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 64 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Misc Config Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 119 Chapter 4 120 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters CommsOverride This parameter allows for local logic to override an 1 0 connection timeout 0 Disable 1 Enable KeypadMode This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or
256. tTrip UserDefinedTrip WarningStatus This parameter provides the current warning condition Parameter Number HardwareFltTrip 7 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0xC044 Bit Default Value 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 Function Reserved UnderPowerWarn Reserved DriveParamlnit Reserved UnswitchedPwrWarn ConfigWarning 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 TripLogO This parameter provides the last trip to occur TripLog1 This parameter provides the second last trip to occur TripLog2 This parameter provides the third last trip to occur TripLog3 This parameter provides the fourth last trip to occur Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 18 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 19 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 20 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Uni
257. tallation The ratings located beneath the description Max Ratings are the specified maximum branch circuit protection The a beside the fuse s indicates that the maximum protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse s 2 Requirement Two Conductor Short circuit and Ground Fault Protection The fuse must protect the conductors for short circuit faults and ground faults Text 7 2 10 4 2 The rating or setting of the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 30 for the smallest conductor in the circuit Analysis Referring to Figure 61 7 2 10 4 2 must be satisfied The fuse as indicated by the description in Figure 61 a is the branch short circuit and ground fault protection device The word circuit means the branch circuit The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end at the input to the motor including the conductors between the motor controllers and the motor The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor The note at b indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor 14 AWG Referring to Table 30 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less c Therefore selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes satisfies the conductor protectio
258. ted Motor controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery and NFPA 70 the National Electrical Code When applied according to the group motor installation requirements two or more motors are permitted on a single branch circuit Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada Note For additional information regarding group motor installations with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller see Appendix A Control Circuit ArmorStart LT accepts a 24V DC Class 2 input power supply for switched and unswitched power The control voltage provides power to the inputs unswitched and outputs switched Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of network connectivity sensor or other field input status under normal operation The control power terminal connections are labeled A1 A2 and A3 Switched power is identified as A1 A2 Unswitched power is identified as A3 A2 As an option ArmorStart LT can be supplied with an internal power supply IPS eliminating the need for an external control power The IPS is sourced from the line side of 3 phase power and is not impacted by the status of the local at motor disconnect switch Figure 6 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Single External Power Supply ArmorStart LT Switched Control Power C J ees Ba Unswitched Control Power Discon
259. the changes made to this revision Information Topic Page Added source brake and IPS specifications Various Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 7 Summary of Changes Notes 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Preface European Communities EC If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the Directive C ompli ance European Union and European Economic Area EEA It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives Low Volta ge and EMC This product is tested to meet the European Union EU Council 2006 95 EC Directives Low Voltage Directive and the EU Council 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive by applying the following standard s e Bulletin 290E_ 291E_ EN 60947 4 1 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4 1 Contactors and motor starters Electromechanical contactors and motor starters e Bulletin 294E_ EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 9 Preface Introduction The ArmorStart LT is an integrated pre engineered mot
260. the motor Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 57 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring Power Distribution AC Line Voltage Line Reactor 58 ae T Pie pain Re na Aa S SP St PS gt me 4 th a K S a n The type of transformer and the connection configuration feeding an ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E plays an important role in its performance and safety Delta Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral Figure 33 Delta Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral is the most common type of distribution system The grounded neutral provides a direct path for common mode current caused by the drive output SHOCK HAZARD ArmorStart LT requires the use of grounded Wye power systems Incoming voltage imbalances greater than 2 can cause large unequal currents in a drive An input line reactor may be necessary when line voltage imbalances are greater than 2 In general ArmorStart LT does not require line reactors In most applications the ArmorStart LT is further away from the power distribution panel therefore the length of cable provides additional impedance as compared to an in panel solution Therefore ArmorStart LT does not define a minimum line impedance specification and does not require a line reactor Its design trades the external reactor supplied by the customer for an internal fan integral to the controller This improves the overall life of the product To achieve maximum electrical
261. tribute_Single Ox4b No Yes Get_Enum_String CLASS CODE 0x0010 The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Group Object Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT The following instance attributes will be supported for all Parameter Group Instances Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING 2 Get Number of Members UINT 3 Get 1st Parameter UINT 4 Get 2nd Parameter UINT n Get Nth Parameter UINT The following common services will be implemented for the Parameter Group Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 213 Appendix B Discrete Input Group Object CIP Information CLASS CODE 0x001D No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Input Group DIP Object A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 6 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP Instances 6 Get Set Off_On_Delay UINT 7 Get Set On_Off_Delay UINT The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Implemented for Service Code Class
262. tributes are supported Revision UINT Value 1 206 Get Max Instance UINT 8 for Bulletin 290E 291E 10 for Bulletin 294E Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Eight instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL Reverser Bulletin 290E 291E units Ten instances are supported for Drive Bulletin 294E units The following table summarizes the DOP Bulletin 290E 291E instances Instance Name Alternate Mapping Description 1 Run Fwd Output 0029 01 03 Run Forward output Run Rev Output 0029 01 04 Run Reverse output 3 User Output A None 4 User Output B one gt User Output C one These are the six ArmorStart LT user outputs for all starter types Their fault 6 User Output D None idle behavior is defined in DOP Instance 3 7 User Output E None 8 User Output F one 9 Drive Jog Fwd None This instances exists for Inverter Bulletin 294E units only 10 Drive Jog Rev None All instances contain the following attribute The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements There are many sources that can affect an output point s value an I O message an explicit messag
263. ts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 21 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 131 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters TripLog4 This parameter provides the fifth last trip to occur SnapShotOutFreq This parameter provides a snapshot of output frequency at time of last trip SnapShotOutAmps This parameter provides a snapshot of output current at time of last trip SnapShotOutVolts This parameter provides a snapshot of output voltage at time of last trip Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 24 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 60 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units x x VAC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 SnapShotBusVolts This parameter provides a snapshot of DC bus voltage le
264. ublication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Bit Function 5 4 3 2 1 Pt00 X Pt01 X Pt02 X Pt03 X Pt04 X Pt05 FilterOffOn Parameter Number 50 i Access Rule GET SET This parameter determines the input which must be present for this time Data Type USINT before being reported ON Group User 1 0 Config Units msecs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 0 FilterOnOff Parameter Number 51 Access Rule GET SET This parameter determines the input which must be absent for this time Data Type USINT before being reported OFF Group User 1 0 Config Units msecs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 0 OutProtFitState Parameter Number 52 Ott de i Access Rule GET SET This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 53 OutProtFitValue defines Data Type BOOL how the starter outputs will respond when a fault occurs Group User 1 0 Config 0 GoToPrFltValue Units 1 IgnorePrFit Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 141 Chapter 4 142 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters OutProtFitValue This parameter determines how the starter outputs will be commande
265. ule Flashing bicolor red green indicates a self test on power up Color_1 Flashing green indicates the device has not been assigned an IP address Steady green indicates the device is configured and operational Color_2 Flashing red indicates a resettable protection fault exists or the node address switches have been changed without a power cycle and do not match the in use configuration Steady red indicates a non resettable protection fault exists 1 0 Status Enunciators 0 5 LEDs Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0 5 and indicate the status of the input output connectors One LED for each 1 0 point Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or output is on Off when input is not valid or the output is not turned on Reset Button Fault Diagnostics 158 The blue reset button will cause a protection fault reset to occur Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick restarting Protection Faults Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected Protection faults are also known as trips or faults These faults will be reported in multiple formats including e Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter parameter 16 used as discrete bits or in DeviceLogix e Inthe ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart
266. ult Value 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 123 Chapter4 Bulletin 290 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bulletin 294E Basic Status Group OutputFreq This parameter provides the output frequency at motor terminals T1 T2 T3 CommandFreq This parameter provides the commanded frequency even if the starter is not running OutputCurrent This parameter provides the output current at motor terminals T1 T2 T3 OutputVoltage This parameter provides the output voltage at motor terminals T1 T2 T3 Parameter Number 1 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x x Hz Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 3 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x xx Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 00 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 4 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Basic Status Units x xV AC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 0 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4
267. ults in more damage to the controller Therefore the additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault currents without controller damage that could result in a shock or fire hazard Consequently to the controller being listed for group installation mostly means the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical and higher ampere rating This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a multiple motor branch circuit provided the fuse is of the same class and does not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller The example in Figure 59 illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere rating of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller This example compares the rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable frequency AC drive based motor controllers Both controllers have a rated power of horsepower and a rated output current of 1 5 amperes The controller shown on the left is intended for installation in individual motor branch circuits The controller shown on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for group Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 181 AppendixA Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery installation to be installed as intended in multiple motor branch circuits For this example assume all testing is done with fuses
268. umber 16 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value OxE3BF 0 Default Value Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 107 Chapter4 Bulletin 290 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 OverloadTrip PhaseLossTrip UnderPowerTrip SensorShortTrip X PhaselmbalanceTrip X NonVolMemoryTrip X Reserved X Jamtrip X StallTrip X UnderloadTrip xX X xX Reserved X OutputShortTrip X UserDefinedTrip X HardwareFltTrip WarningStatus Parameter Number 17 This parameter provides the current Access Rule gl warning condition Data Type WORD Group Trip Status Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 0xC295 Default Value Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7615 4 3 OverloadWarning Reserved UnderPowerWarn Reserved PhaselmbalanceWarn Reserved JamWarning Reserved UnderloadWarning Reserved UnswitchedPwrWarn ConfigWarning 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 TripLog1 This parameter provides the last trip to occur TripLog2 This parameter provides t
269. umidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings IP66 UL Type 4 12 Approximate Shipping Weight 4 6 kg 10 Ib Mechanical Ratings cease Operational 30 G exceeds IEC 60947 1 Non Operational 50 G exceeds IEC 60947 1 Operational 2 5 G tested to MIL STD 810G exceeds IEC 60947 1 Resistance to Vibration Non Operational 5 G tested to MIL STD 810G exceeds IEC 60947 1 Disconnect Lock Out Maximum of 3 8 in 9 5 mm diameter lock shackle or hasp Disconnect LOTO Locks Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported Disconnect Mechanical Life 200 000 operations Contractor Utilization Category AC 1 AC 3 AC 4 refer to Life Load Curves IEC Contactor Opening Delay 8 12ms Contactor Closing Delay 18 40 ms Minimum Off Time 200 ms Contactor Mechanical Life 15 million operations Power Terminals Motor Terminals Control Terminals PE Ground Wire Size 2 18 10 AWG 18 10 AWG 2 18 10 AWG 2 16 10 AWG 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal 0 8 5 2 mm per terminal 1 352 mm per terminal Wire Type Multi strand copper wire Tightening Torque 10 6 2 Ibein 1 2 0 2 Nem 18 2 Ibein 2 0 2 Nem Wire Strip Length 0 35 0 01 in 9 2 mm Power Rating 600V AC 25 Amp 600 V AC 10 Amp 600 V AC 10 Amp Emission and Immunity Ratings Conducted EN 60947 4 1 Radiated Class A Emission Electrostati
270. us 1 OutputFreq 2 CommandFreq 3 OutputCurrent 4 OutputVoltage 5 DCBusVoltage 6 StarterStatus 7 Startercommand 8 AuxlOStatus 9 NetworkStatus 10 DLXControlStatus 11 OutputSourceV 12 SensorSourceV 13 InternalFanRPM 14 ElapsedRunTime 15 DriveTemperature Common to Bulletin 290E 291E and Bulletin 294E Units Trip Status 16 TripStatus 20 TripLog2 17 WarningStatus 21 TripLog3 18 TripLogO 22 TripLog4 19 TripLog1 Bulletin 290E 291E Units Bulletin 294E Units Trip Status 23 SnapShotL1Amps 23 SnapShotOutFreq 24 SnapShotL2Amps 24 SnapShotOutAmps 25 SnapShotL3Amps 25 SnapShotOutVolts 26 SnapShotAvgAmps 26 SnapShotBusVolts 27 SnapShot Thermal 27 SnapShotDrvlemp Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Bulletin 290E 291E Units Basic Config 28 FLASetting 29 OLResetLevel 30 OverloadClass 31 40 Reserved Bulletin 294E Units Motor and Control 28 MotorNPVolts 29 MotorNPHertz 30 MotorOLCurrent 31 CurrentLimit 32 StopMode Bulletin 290E 291E Units Advance 69 OLWarningLevel 70 JaminhibitTime 71 JamfripDelay 72 JamfripLevel 73 JamWarningLevel 74 StallEnabledTime 75 StallTripLevel 76 ULInhibitTime 77 ULTripDelay 78 ULTripLevel 79 ULWarningLevel Speed Control 33 SpeedReference 34 MinimumFreq 35 MaximumFreq 36 AccelTime1 37 DecelTime1 38 SCurvePercent 39 JogFrequency 40 JogAccelDecel Bulletin 294E Units d Config 69 AccelTime2 70 DecelTime2 71
271. utomation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation contact Customer Support United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support Canada americas phone_en html or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 5 New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 Summary of Changes New and Updated This table contains
272. vel at time of last trip SnapShotDrvTemp This parameter provides a snapshot of operating temperature at time of last trip Motor and Control Group MotorNPVolts O Stop drive before changing this parameter Set to the motor nameplate rated voltage MotorNPHertz oO Stop drive before changing this parameter Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Parameter Number 26 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units VDC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1200 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Trip Status Units C Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Motor and Control Units VAC Minimum Value 35 Maximum Value 460 Default Value 460 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Motor and Control Units Hz Minimum Value 10 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 133 Chapter4 Bulletin 290E 291E 294E Programmable Parameters MotorOLCurrent Parameter Number 30 Set to the maximum allowable motor current Relate cuss euler Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Motor and Control Cat No Hp kW Min Amps Def
273. w eso ad thee ArmorGonn ct POWE neona 398 sities Saw sont Us Sn RA RET wise OS ArmorConnect Cable Ratings isd as simiereeaasdderseesarraremees Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media secu ews vicicdatece nde oiises wanetcdteats Electrical W iting as irs yews oes tani io she Sa Meehan a Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets DW TIA Siesta ei ait alt Gah lads thle hns EE E actly Sa tO ity ati tacts Cable Workmanship Guidelines ds tches bee detenantoetel ds Service S PACE Haakon deel Aaa ve Sari ha tne ls dah has Ree nes Hand Operation HOA Considerations 00e cece eee General Wiring Considerations sivcscatutewiedies Be Kauai iann Gee eware GOUGING se igs r A aay chee ke ev A Gane Stele Guise tS aaa Grounding Safety Grounds coats dosnies apy aor aieana acnrnke Grounding PE or Ground tas c5 2 tose h csv eames bees eked is Grounding Motors sperren aaee chsh sae eoae eas cued se Power istt batons sess iinne e herein nee T a eed emt Delta Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral 000 00s AC Line Voltige ne iaee era w deans EE E A A EE EEA EO AEE PEE A ESEE E EEEE T EET ees Bulletin 294E Motor Cable Considerations 0 0ce cence Unshielded Gale Soak dl AS Soe i ed oUt het bie i cued Shielded Cables tiie trates he Beg eG ee athe ne eta e Recommended Cable Connectors Glands 0 000 eee eee Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June
274. x Reserved X UnswitchedPwrWarn X ConfigWarning ProtectFitReset Parameter Number 44 A Rul GET SET This parameter resets a Protection Fault by paints setting the bit to 1 Data Type BOOL 0 NoAction G Siarter Urata 0 gt 1 ResetFautt roup arter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 RunNetFltAction Parameter Number 45 eae Access Rule GET SET This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 46 RunNetFtValue defines Data Type BOOL how the starter will respond when a fault occurs Group Starter Protection 0 GoloFaultValue Units g 1 HoldLastState Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 RunNetFitValue This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault State the starter will go to on a NetFit if Parameter 45 RunNetFitAction 1 GotoFault Value 0 OFF 1 0N RunNetldlAction This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 48 RunNetldlValue defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 48 0 GololdleValue 1 HoldLastState RunNetldlValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 47 RunNetldlAction is set tol 0 OFF 1 0N User 1 0 Configuration Group 10PointConfigure This parameter determines the point that is configured 0 Input 1 Output Bulletin 290E 291E 2
275. y of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence
276. yPadAuto DLXEnabled 6 Output Frequency Low xxx x Hz 7 Output Frequency High xxx x Hz 8 Pt05 Pto4 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00 9 10 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut PtOSDeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut PtO2DeviceOut PtO1DeviceOut PtOODeviceOut 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E UM001B EN P June 2012 CIP Information Appendix B Instance 156 Drive Status Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters 11 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut 12 An00DeviceOut low byte 13 An00DeviceOut high byte 14 Parameter 3 OutputCurrent 15 16 Parameter 4 OutputVoltage 17 18 Parameter 5 DCBusVoltage 19 20 Parameter 11 SwitchedVolts 1 OutputSourceV IPS units 22 Parameter 12 UnswitchedVolts 23 SensorSourceV IPS units 24 Parameter 13 InternalFanRPM 25 26 Parameter 14 ElaspedRunTime 27 28 Parameter 15 DriveTemperature 29 30 Parameter 16 TripStatus 31 32 Parameter 17 WarningStatus 33 Connection Manager Object CLASS CODE 0x0006 No class attributes will be supported for the Connection Manager Object One Instance of the Connection Manager Object will be supported It has the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Set Open Requests UINT Number of Forward Open service requests received 2

ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents